Automatic Transmission: Section

TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION AT B
AT
E
CONTENTS
5AT: RE5R05A Engine Brake Control ..............................................43 F
Control Valve ...........................................................43
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 9
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
G
APPLICATION NOTICE ...................................... 9 (FOR TYPE 2) ................................................... 45
How to Check Vehicle Type ...................................... 9 Introduction ..............................................................45
OBD Function for A/T System .................................45
INDEX FOR DTC ................................................10 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD ................45 H
Alphabetical Index ................................................... 10 OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................45
DTC No. Index ........................................................ 11 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................46
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................14 I
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................... 48
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................48
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Fail-Safe ..................................................................48
SIONER" ................................................................. 14 J
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System Accurate Repair .......................................................49
of A/T and Engine (For Type 2) ............................... 14 A/T Electrical Parts Location ...................................56
Precaution ............................................................... 14 Circuit Diagram ........................................................58 K
Service Notice or Precaution ................................... 15 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .....................58
PREPARATION ..................................................16 Road Test ................................................................61
Special Service Tool ............................................... 16 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ........67 L
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 17 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-
es .............................................................................68
A/T FLUID ...........................................................18 Symptom Chart ........................................................69
M
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 18 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value .............96
Adjusting A/T Fluid .................................................. 19 CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION) ..................97
Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT ............... 106
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................21 N
Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 109
2WD) ....................................................................... 21 Description ............................................................. 109
Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 109 O
4WD) ....................................................................... 22 Possible Cause ...................................................... 109
Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD).... 23 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 109
Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD).... 24 Wiring Diagram - AT - CAN ................................... 110
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 111 P
Shift Mechanism ...................................................... 24
TCM Function .......................................................... 36
CAN Communication ............................................... 38
P0615 STARTER RELAY ............................... 112
Input/Output Signal of TCM ..................................... 39 Description ............................................................. 112
Line Pressure Control ............................................. 39 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 112
Shift Control ............................................................ 41
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 112
Lock-up Control ....................................................... 42
AT-1
Possible Cause ......................................................112 Possible Cause ..................................................... 133
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................112 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 133
Wiring Diagram - AT - STSIG ................................113 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 134
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................114
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 136
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL ................ 116 Description ............................................................ 136
Description .............................................................116 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 136
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................116 Possible Cause ..................................................... 136
Possible Cause ......................................................116 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 136
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................116 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 139
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 117 Description ............................................................ 139
Description .............................................................117 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 139
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Possible Cause ..................................................... 139
Mode ......................................................................117 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 139
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................117 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 140
Possible Cause ......................................................117
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................117 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 142
Wiring Diagram - AT - TM/SW ...............................118 Description ............................................................ 142
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................118 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 142
Possible Cause ..................................................... 142
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A .................. 121 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 142
Description .............................................................121 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................121 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 145
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................121 Description ............................................................ 145
Possible Cause ......................................................121 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................121 Mode ..................................................................... 145
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................122 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 145
Possible Cause ..................................................... 145
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR .................. 123 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 145
Description .............................................................123 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146
Mode ......................................................................123 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 147
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................123 Description ............................................................ 147
Possible Cause ......................................................123 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................123 Mode ..................................................................... 147
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T ..............................125 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 147
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................125 Possible Cause ..................................................... 147
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 147
P0725 ENGINE SPEED ................................... 128 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 148
Description .............................................................128
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 149
Mode ......................................................................128 Description ............................................................ 149
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................128 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Possible Cause ......................................................128 Mode ..................................................................... 149
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................128 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 149
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................128 Possible Cause ..................................................... 149
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO .................... 130 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 149
Description .............................................................130
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................130 P1705 TP SENSOR .......................................... 151
Possible Cause ......................................................130 Description ............................................................ 151
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................130 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................131 Mode ..................................................................... 151
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 151
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO .................... 133 Possible Cause ..................................................... 151
Description .............................................................133 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 151
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................133 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 151
AT-2
P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 167
TURE SENSOR ................................................ 153 Possible Cause ...................................................... 167 A
Description ............................................................ 153 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 167
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168
Mode ..................................................................... 153 B
P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
Possible Cause ..................................................... 153 SOLENOID ...................................................... 169
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 153 Description ............................................................. 169
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor AT
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS .................................... 154
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 154 Mode ...................................................................... 169
Component Inspection .......................................... 155 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 169
Possible Cause ...................................................... 169 D
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 157 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 169
Description ............................................................ 157 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor E
Mode ..................................................................... 157 P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID ...... 171
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 157 Description ............................................................. 171
Possible Cause ..................................................... 157 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 157 Mode ...................................................................... 171 F
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 157 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 171
Possible Cause ...................................................... 171
P1730 INTERLOCK .......................................... 159 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 171 G
Description ............................................................ 159 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172
Possible Cause ..................................................... 159 P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID ...... 173
Description ............................................................. 173 H
Judgment of A/T Interlock ..................................... 159 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 173 I
P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ....................... 161 Possible Cause ...................................................... 173
J
Mode ..................................................................... 161
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH ............................... 175
Possible Cause ..................................................... 161 Description ............................................................. 175
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 161 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor K
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 175
P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID ................ 163 Possible Cause ...................................................... 175 L
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram - AT - MMSW ............................... 176
Mode ..................................................................... 163 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 177
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 163 Component Inspection ........................................... 178 M
Possible Cause ..................................................... 163
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 163 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 164 CUIT ................................................................ 179 N
Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN .................................. 179
P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID ................. 165 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180
Description ............................................................ 165
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE O
Mode ..................................................................... 165 OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT ......... 183
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 165 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Possible Cause ..................................................... 165 Mode ...................................................................... 183 P
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 165 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 183
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............................. 184
P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID .............. 167 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ............................................................ 167 Mode ...................................................................... 184
Mode ..................................................................... 167
AT-3
1ST POSITION SWITCH ................................. 185 Rear Oil Seal ......................................................... 247
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Output Speed Sensor Component (2WD Models
Mode ......................................................................185 Only) ..................................................................... 248
AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 254
OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH .................. 187 Removal and Installation ....................................... 254
Mode ......................................................................187 A/T FLUID COOLER ........................................ 256
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................187 Removal and Installation ....................................... 256
A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT ............................... 189 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 259

Description .............................................................189 Removal and Installation (YD25DDTi Models) ..... 259
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models) ........ 262
Mode ......................................................................189 OVERHAUL ...................................................... 267
Component ........................................................... 267
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ..... 190 Oil Channel ........................................................... 277
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC ............................190 Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On .. 193 Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 279
Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position ..193 DISASSEMBLY ................................................ 283
In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed .......194 Disassembly .......................................................... 283
In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves ..............................194
Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position) ..........................195 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .............. 301
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position..197 Oil Pump ............................................................... 301
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" Position ..199 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ................... 303
Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1 .......................200 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 305
A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2 ..................................202 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Re-
A/T Does Not Shift: D2→ D3 ..................................204 verse Clutch Hub .................................................. 311
A/T Does Not Shift: D3→ D4 ..................................205 High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 317
A/T Does Not Shift: D4→ D5 ..................................207 Direct Clutch ......................................................... 319
A/T Does Not Lock-up ...........................................209
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ...................210 ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 323
Lock-up Is Not Released .......................................211 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 323
Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle .................212 Adjustment ............................................................ 336
A/T Does Not Shift: 5GR → 4GR ...........................213 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 338
A/T Does Not Shift: 4GR → 3GR ...........................214
A/T Does Not Shift: 3GR → 2GR ...........................216 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
A/T Does Not Shift: 2GR → 1GR ...........................217 (SDS) ................................................................ 345
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake .....218 General Specification ............................................ 345
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ...................220 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ..... 345
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM ............................ 221 es .......................................................................... 346
A/T Shift Selector Removal and Installation ..........221 Stall Speed ............................................................ 347
Control Cable Removal and Installation ................223 Line Pressure ........................................................ 347
Adjustment of A/T Position ....................................225 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 347
Checking of A/T Position .......................................225 Output Speed Sensor ........................................... 347
Input Speed Sensor .............................................. 347
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................. 227 Reverse Brake ...................................................... 347
Description .............................................................227 Total End Play ....................................................... 348
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ..........227 7AT: RE7R01B
Wiring Diagram - A/T - SHIFT ................................228
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................228 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................. 349
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ............................... 231 APPLICATION NOTICE ................................... 349
Removal and Installation .......................................231 How to Check A/T Type ........................................ 349
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .................................. 233 PRECAUTION ........................................... 350
Control Valve with TCM .........................................233
Parking Component (2WD Models Only) ...............240 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 350
AT-4
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System TRANSMISSION : System Diagram ...................... 360
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- TRANSMISSION : System Description ................. 360 A
SIONER" ............................................................... 350 TRANSMISSION : Component Description ........... 383
Precaution for Battery Service (for V9X Models) .. 350
General Precautions ............................................. 350 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM ....................................... 383
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM : System Description .. 383 B
PREPARATION ......................................... 352
SYSTEM .......................................................... 386
PREPARATION ................................................ 352 AT
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ......................................... 386
Special Service Tool ............................................. 352
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram ......... 386
Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 353
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ..... 386
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 354 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe ..................... 387 D
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control ....... 389
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 354
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL .................................. 390
E
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ......................................... 354 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Diagram.. 390
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo- LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Descrip-
cation ..................................................................... 354 tion ......................................................................... 391
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Descrip- F
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL .................................... 392
tion ........................................................................ 355
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Diagram .... 393
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM ........................... 355
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range G
.. 394
Switch .................................................................... 355
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor.. 356 SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL .................................. 396
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor .. 356 SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Diagram .. 397 H
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Descrip-
Sensor ................................................................... 356 tion ......................................................................... 397
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid
Valve ..................................................................... 356 LOCK-UP CONTROL .............................................. 398 I
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Diagram .............. 399
Valve ..................................................................... 356 LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description .......... 399
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid J
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 400
Valve ..................................................................... 356
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description.. 400
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse
Clutch Solenoid Valve ........................................... 356 KEY LOCK SYSTEM ............................................... 401 K
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description ........... 401
Valve ..................................................................... 356
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .. 402
L
Valve ..................................................................... 357 Diagnosis Description ............................................ 402
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid
Valve ..................................................................... 357 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) .......................... 403
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter CONSULT Function ............................................... 403 M
Clutch Solenoid Valve ........................................... 357
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 410
Valve ..................................................................... 357 TCM ................................................................. 410 N
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Po- Reference Value .................................................... 410
sition Sensor ......................................................... 357 Fail-Safe ................................................................ 416
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch .. 357 Protection Control .................................................. 419 O
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor .................... 357 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 420
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 357 DTC Index ............................................................. 421
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts P
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 423
Location ................................................................. 358
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Descrip- A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 423
tion ........................................................................ 358 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 423
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ..................... 359 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................. 429
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 429
TRANSMISSION ...................................................... 359
TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional View .............. 359
AT-5
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 431 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 450
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 431 P0725 ENGINE SPEED .................................... 452
Diagnosis Flow ......................................................431 Description ............................................................ 452
Question sheet ......................................................432 DTC Logic ............................................................. 452
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ......................... 434 P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 454
Description .............................................................434 Description ............................................................ 454
Special Repair Requirement ..................................434 DTC Logic ............................................................. 454
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL VALVE & TCM .............................. 435 P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO .................. 456
Special Repair Requirement ..................................435 DTC Logic ............................................................. 456
G SENSOR CALIBRATION ............................. 436
Description .............................................................436 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 458
Special Repair Requirement ..................................436 Description ............................................................ 458
DTC Logic ............................................................. 458
A/T FLUID ........................................................ 437 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 459
Changing ...............................................................437
Adjustment .............................................................438 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 460
Description ............................................................ 460
STALL TEST .................................................... 440 DTC Logic ............................................................. 460
Inspection and Judgment ......................................440 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 461
A/T POSITION ................................................. 441 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 462
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................441 Description ............................................................ 462
DTC Logic ............................................................. 462
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 442 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 463
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA ........... 442 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 464
DTC Logic ..............................................................442 DTC Logic ............................................................. 464
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................442 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 465
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 443 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 466
P0615 STARTER RELAY ................................ 444 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 468
Description .............................................................444 DTC Logic ............................................................. 468
DTC Logic ..............................................................444 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 468
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 469
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 446 Description ............................................................ 469
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 470
TURE SENSOR A ............................................ 447 DTC Logic ............................................................. 470
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A ............................. 471
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A .................. 449 DTC Logic ............................................................. 471
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 472
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR .................. 450 DTC Logic ............................................................. 472
AT-6
P0780 SHIFT .................................................... 473 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 495
Description ............................................................ 473 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 473 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ................................... 496
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 473 Component Function Check .................................. 496
B
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C.. 475 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 498
DTC Logic ............................................................. 475 Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) ...... 498
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 475 Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) ........ 498
AT
P1585 G SENSOR ............................................ 476 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 500
DTC Logic ............................................................. 476
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 476 SYSTEM SYMPTOM ....................................... 500
Symptom Table ..................................................... 500 D
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 478
P1705 TP SENSOR .......................................... 479 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 510

DTC Logic ............................................................. 479 E
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR ................................... 510
Exploded View ....................................................... 510
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 480 Removal and Installation ....................................... 510
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 511 F
Description ............................................................ 480
DTC Logic ............................................................. 480
CONTROL CABLE .......................................... 512
Exploded View ....................................................... 512 G
P1730 INTERLOCK .......................................... 482 Removal and Installation ....................................... 512
Description ............................................................ 482 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 513
DTC Logic ............................................................. 482 H
Judgment of Interlock ............................................ 482
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE .............................. 514
Exploded View ....................................................... 514
Removal and Installation ....................................... 514
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 484 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 515 I
Description ............................................................ 484
DTC Logic ............................................................. 484
G SENSOR ...................................................... 516
Exploded View ....................................................... 516
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 485 J
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH ................................ 486 Adjustment ............................................................. 516
DTC Logic ............................................................. 486
CONTROL VALVE & TCM .............................. 517 K
Exploded View ....................................................... 517
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ..... 488
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D.. 489 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 521
L
DTC Logic ............................................................. 489
AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................. 522
Exploded View ....................................................... 522
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E.. 490 Removal and Installation ....................................... 522 M
DTC Logic ............................................................. 490
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM .............................. 524
Exploded View ....................................................... 524
Removal and Installation ....................................... 525 N
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F.. 491
DTC Logic ............................................................. 491 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 526
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 527 O
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G.. 492
DTC Logic ............................................................. 492 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................ 527
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 492 Exploded View ....................................................... 527
Removal and Installation ....................................... 527 P
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 529
CUIT .................................................................. 493
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 493 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . 530
A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT ................................ 495 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................ 530

Description ............................................................ 495 Exploded View ....................................................... 530
Component Function Check .................................. 495 Oil Channel ............................................................ 538
AT-7
Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races .. 539 Assembly .............................................................. 601
Location of Snap Rings .........................................540 Inspection .............................................................. 603
Disassembly ..........................................................540
Assembly ...............................................................556 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH ............. 604
Inspection ..............................................................578 Exploded View ...................................................... 604
Disassembly .......................................................... 605
OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE Assembly .............................................................. 605
PISTON ............................................................ 581 Inspection .............................................................. 606
Exploded View .......................................................581
Disassembly ..........................................................581 DIRECT CLUTCH ............................................. 607
Assembly ...............................................................585 Exploded View ...................................................... 607
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................588 Disassembly .......................................................... 607
Assembly .............................................................. 607
UNDER DRIVE CARRIER, FRONT BRAKE Inspection .............................................................. 608
HUB .................................................................. 590
Exploded View .......................................................590 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Disassembly ..........................................................590 (SDS) ......................................................... 609
Assembly ...............................................................591
Inspection ..............................................................591
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 609
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR General Specification ............................................ 609
INTERNAL GEAR ............................................ 593 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ..... 609
Exploded View .......................................................593 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-
Disassembly ..........................................................595 es .......................................................................... 610
Assembly ...............................................................596 Stall Speed ............................................................ 610
Inspection ..............................................................598 Torque Converter .................................................. 610
Total End Play ....................................................... 610
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH Reverse Brake Clearance ..................................... 610
AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB ............. 599 Front Brake Clearance .......................................... 610
Exploded View .......................................................599 2346 Brake Clearance .......................................... 611
Disassembly ..........................................................599
AT-8
APPLICATION NOTICE
< SERVICE INFORMATION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
SERVICE INFORMATION A
APPLICATION NOTICE
How to Check Vehicle Type INFOID:0000000005443593
B
Check the vehicle type to confirm the service information in AT section.
Service information Remarks AT

TYPE 1 Without EURO-OBD. Refer to GI-48, "Identification Number".
TYPE 2 With EURO-OBD. Refer to GI-48, "Identification Number".
D
AT-9
INDEX FOR DTC
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index INFOID:0000000005443594
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to AT-109.
TYPE 1
Items
DTC Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms)
1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 AT-130
1ST E/BRAKING P1731 AT-161
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AT-109
DRCT CLUTCH SOLENOID P1762 AT-167
ENGINE SPEED P0725 AT-128
FR BRAKE SOLENOID P1757 AT-165
HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID P1767 AT-169
INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID P1752 AT-163
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 AT-121
INTERLOCK P1730 AT-159
L C BRAKE SOLENOID P1772 AT-171
M-MODE SWITCH P1815 AT-175
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 AT-123
PC SOLENOID A P0745 AT-149
STARTER RELAY P0615 AT-112
T/M RANGE SENSOR A P0705 AT-117
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 AT-145
TP SENSOR P1705 AT-151
TRANS FLUID TEMP SEN P1710 AT-153
TRANSMISSION CONT P0700 AT-116
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL P1721 AT-157
TYPE 2
DTC*1
Items
MIL*2, “ENGINE” CONSULT Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms) only “TRANSMIS-
with CONSULT or
GST SION”
1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 P0731 AT-130
1ST E/BRAKING — P1731 AT-161
AT-10
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
A
Items
MIL*2, “ENGINE” CONSULT Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms) only “TRANSMIS-
with CONSULT or
GST SION”
B
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-109 AT
DRCT CLUTCH SOLENOID P1762 P1762 AT-167
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 AT-128
FR BRAKE SOLENOID P1757 P1757 AT-165
D
HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID P1767 P1767 AT-169

INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID P1752 P1752 AT-163 E
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 AT-121
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-159
L C BRAKE SOLENOID P1772 P1772 AT-171 F
L C BRAKE SOLENOID P1774*3 P1774 AT-173
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 AT-175 G
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 AT-123
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 AT-149
STARTER RELAY — P0615 AT-112 H
T/M RANGE SENSOR A P0705 P0705 AT-117
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 AT-145
I
TP SENSOR — P1705 AT-151
TRANS FLUID TEMP SEN P0710 P1710 AT-153 J
TRANSMISSION CONT P0700 P0700 AT-116
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 AT-157
K
*1: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*2: Refer to AT-46, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
*3: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
L
DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000005443595
NOTE: M
TYPE 1 N
Items
DTC Reference page
O
P0615 STARTER RELAY AT-112
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONT AT-116
P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A AT-117 P
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A AT-121
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AT-123
P0725 ENGINE SPEED AT-128
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-130
AT-11
INDEX FOR DTC
Items
DTC Reference page
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-145
P0745 PC SOLENOID A AT-149
P1705 TP SENSOR AT-151
P1710 TRANS FLUID TEMP SEN AT-153
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL AT-157
P1730 INTERLOCK AT-159
P1731 1ST E/BRAKING AT-161
P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-163
P1757 FR BRAKE SOLENOID AT-165
P1762 DRCT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-167
P1767 HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-169
P1772 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-171
P1774 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-173
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH AT-175
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-109
TYPE 2
DTC*1
OBD Except OBD
Items
Reference page
MIL*2, “ENGINE” with CONSULT only
CONSULT or “TRANSMISSION”
GST
— P0615 STARTER RELAY AT-112
P0700 P0700 TRANSMISSION CONT AT-116
P0705 P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A AT-117
P0717 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A AT-153
P0720 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AT-121
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED AT-123
P0731 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-128
P0740 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-142
P0744 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-145
P0745 P0745 PC SOLENOID A AT-147
— P1705 TP SENSOR AT-149
P0710 P1710 TRANS FLUID TEMP SEN AT-151
— P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL AT-157
P1730 P1730 INTERLOCK AT-159
AT-12
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
A
OBD Except OBD
Items
Reference page
MIL*2, “ENGINE” with CONSULT only
CONSULT or “TRANSMISSION” B
GST
— P1731 1ST E/BRAKING AT-161
P1752 P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-163 AT
P1757 P1757 FR BRAKE SOLENOID AT-165
P1762 P1762 DRCT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-167
P1767 P1767 HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-169
D
P1772 P1772 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-171
P1774*3 P1774 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-173 E

— P1815 M-MODE SWITCH AT-175
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-109
F
G
AT-13
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005443596
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of A/T and Engine (For Type 2)
INFOID:0000000005443597
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid
valves, etc. Will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. May cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution INFOID:0000000005443598
• Before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly har-

ness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the
battery cable from the negative terminal. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC
Confirmation Procedure”.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-25.
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
SEF289H
• After replacing ATF, dispose of the waste oil using the methods
prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to pre-
vent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
AT-14
PRECAUTIONS
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly. A
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
B
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and AT
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF. D
• When the drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter
and A/T fluid cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to
AT-18, "Changing A/T Fluid". E
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000005443599
F
OBD SELF-DIAGNOSIS (FOR TYPE 2)
• A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on
AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. G
• The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memo-
ries.
Always perform the procedure on AT-45, "OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" to complete the H
repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
For details of OBD, refer to EC-553.
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-82. I
AT-15
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000005443600
Tool number
Description
Tool name
ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure
Oil pressure gauge set
1. ST25051001
Oil pressure gauge
2. ST25052000
Hose
3. ST25053000
Joint pipe
4. ST25054000
Adapter SCIA3695J
5. ST25055000
Adapter
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure
Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)
ZZA1227D
ST33400001 • Installing rear oil seal (2WD models)

Drift • Installing oil pump housing oil seal
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
NT086
KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer

Clutch spring compressor
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
NT423
ST25850000 Remove oil pump assembly

Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12X1.75P
NT422
AT-16
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000005443601
Tool name Description

Drift Installing manual shaft oil seals B
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
AT
NT083 D
Drift Installing rear oil seal (4WD models)
a: 64 mm (2.52 in) dia.
E
F
SCIA5338E
1. 315268E000* A/T fluid changing and adjustment

O-ring G
2. 310811EA5A*
Charging pipe
H
JSDIA1332ZZ
I
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
AT-17
A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID
Changing A/T Fluid INFOID:0000000005443602
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to AT-345, "General Specification".

CAUTION:
• If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
1. Step 1
a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
JSDIA1334ZZ
2. Step 2
a. Use CONSULT to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION: JSDIA1335ZZ
Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from

the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
l. Stop the engine.
3. Step 3
a. Repeat “Step 2”.
4. Final Step
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
AT-18
A/T FLUID
d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to AT-233,
"Control Valve with TCM". A
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. B
CAUTION:
AT
CAUTION:
charging pipe. D
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
E
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.

the oil pan. F
k. Start the engine.
l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F). G
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP
1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT. H
m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug I
from the oil pan.
p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to AT-
233, "Control Valve with TCM". J
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.
Adjusting A/T Fluid INFOID:0000000006081259 K
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to AT-345, "General Specification". L

CAUTION:
• If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T M
• Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking
with CONSULT when the ATF level adjustment is performed. N
1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Start the engine. O
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always P
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor”
using CONSULT.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selec- JSDIA1334ZZ
tor lever in “P” position.
6. Lift up the vehicle.
AT-19
A/T FLUID
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
charging pipe.
11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF.
12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and
the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF.
JSDIA1335ZZ
13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil
pan to the specified torque. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
CAUTION:
AT-20
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A
Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD) INFOID:0000000005443604
AT
I
SCIA7318E
1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear J

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump K
13. 3rd one-way clutch 14. Front brake 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft L
AT-21
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD) INFOID:0000000005443605
SCIA5268E
1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch
19. Adapter case 20. Output shaft
AT-22
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD) INFOID:0000000005443606
AT
SCIA6946E
I
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake J
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch K
19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft
AT-23
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD) INFOID:0000000005443607
SCIA6947E

19. Adapter case 20. Output shaft
Shift Mechanism INFOID:0000000005443608
The A/T uses compact triple planetary gear systems to improve power transmission efficiency, simplify con-
struction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
CONSTRUCTION
AT-24
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT
PCIA0002J F
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
G
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier H
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl I
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Name of the Part Abbreviation Function J

Front brake (1) FR/B Fastens the front sun gear (11)
Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal gear
Input clutch (2) I/C
(13)
K
Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16)
High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16) L
Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15)
Forward brake (6) Fwd/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17)
Low coast brake (7) LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17) M
Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear (17)
1st one-way clutch (8) 1st OWC
but fastens it for reverse rotation
Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for
N
Forward one-way clutch (9) Fwd OWC
reverse rotation
Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for
3rd one-way clutch (10) 3rd OWC
reverse rotation O
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

Without Manual Mode P
1st Fwd 3rd

Shift position I/C HLR/C D/C R/B FR/B LC/B Fwd/B Remarks
OWC OWC OWC
P PARK POSITION
REVERSE POSI-
R
TION
AT-25
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
1st Fwd 3rd
OWC OWC OWC
NEUTRAL POSI-
N
TION
1st
2nd
Automatic shift
D*1 3rd
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
4th
5th
1st
2nd Automatic shift

3
3rd 1⇔2⇔3⇐4
4th
1st
2nd Automatic shift

2
3rd 1⇔2⇐3⇐4
4th
1st
Locks (held sta-
2nd tionary in 1st
1
3rd gear)
1⇐2⇐3⇐4
4th
• —Operates
• —Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
• —Operates and effects power transmission while coasting.
• —Line pressure is applied but does not affect power transmission.
• —Operates under conditions shown in HLR/C Operating Condition
• —Operates under conditions shown in LC/B Operating Condition. Delay control is applied during “D” (4,3,2,1) ⇒“N” shift.
• *1: A/T will not shift to 5th when OD OFF. (OD OFF indicator lamp is on.)
SCIA5642E
With Manual Mode
1st Fwd 3rd

OWC OWC OWC
P PARK POSITION
REVERSE PO-
R
SITION
AT-26
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
1st Fwd 3rd
OWC OWC OWC A
NEUTRAL POSI-
N
TION
1st B
2nd
Automatic shift
D 3rd AT
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
4th
5th D
1st
2nd
E
Automatic shift
M5 3rd
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
4th
F
5th
1st
G
2nd Automatic shift
M4
3rd 1⇔2⇔3⇔4
4th H
1st
Automatic shift
M3 2nd I
1⇔2⇔3
3rd
1st Automatic shift J

M2
2nd 1⇔2
1st Locks (held sta-

M1 K
2nd tionary in 1GR)
• —Operates
L
• —Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
• —Operates and effects power transmission while coasting.
• —Line pressure is applied but does not affect power transmission. M
• —Operates under conditions shown in HLR/C Operating Condition
• —Operates under conditions shown in LC/B Operating Condition. Delay control is applied during D (4,3,2,1) ⇒N shift.
N
SCIA5642E
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position
AT-27
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-
mitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
• The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque from
the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the select lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
PCIA0003J

13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
“D”, “3” and “2” Positions 1st Gear (Without Manual Mode)/“D” Position 1st Gear (With Manual Mode)
• The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
• The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
• During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.
AT-28
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT
H
SCIA1512E

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake I
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier J
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl K
“1” Position 1st Gear (Without Manual Mode)/“M1” Position 1st Gear (With Manual Mode)
• The front brake fastens the front sun gear. L
• High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
• The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
• During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake M
functions.
AT-29
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1513E

“D” and “3” Positions 2nd Gear (Without Manual Mode)/“D” Position 2nd Gear (With Manual Mode)
• The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
• The direct clutch is coupled and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
• During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine brake is
not activated.
AT-30
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT
H
SCIA1514E

“2” and “1” Positions 2nd Gear (Without Manual Mode)/ “M2” Position 2st Gear (With Manual Mode)
• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
• The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
• During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake M
functions.
AT-31
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1515E

“D” and “3” Positions 3rd Gear (Without Manual Mode)/“D” and “M3” Positions 3rd Gear (With Manual Mode)
• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
• The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
AT-32
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT
H
SCIA1516E

“D” Position 4th Gear (Without Manual Mode)/“D” and “M4” Positions 4th Gear (With Manual Mode)
• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. L
• The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
• The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three plan-
etary gears rotate forward as one unit. M
AT-33
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1517E

“D” Position 5th Gear (Without Manual Mode)/ “D” and “M5” Positions 5th Gear (With Manual Mode)
• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
• The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
AT-34
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT
H
SCIA1518E

“R” position
• The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.
M
AT-35
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1519E

TCM Function INFOID:0000000005443609
The function of the TCM is to:

• Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
• Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-
mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
Without Manual Mode
AT-36
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS A

Transmission range switch
Input clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal
Shift control Direct clutch solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal
Line pressure control Front brake solenoid valve B
Wide open throttle position signal
Lock-up control High and low reverse clutch solenoid
Engine speed signal
Engine brake control valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor ⇒ ⇒
Timing control Low coast brake solenoid valve
Output speed sensor AT
Fail-safe control Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Vehicle speed signal
Self-diagnosis Line pressure solenoid valve
1st position switch signal
CONSULT communication line OD OFF indicator lamp
Overdrive control switch signal
Duet-EA control A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Stop lamp switch signal
CAN system Starter relay
D
Input speed sensor
Back-up lamp relay
ATF pressure switch
With Manual Mode E
SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS

Transmission range switch F
Accelerator pedal position signal Shift control
Direct clutch solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal Line pressure control
Front brake solenoid valve
Wide open throttle position signal Lock-up control
High and low reverse clutch solenoid G
Engine speed signal Engine brake control
⇒ ⇒ valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor Timing control
Low coast brake solenoid valve
Output speed sensor Fail-safe control
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Vehicle speed signal Self-diagnosis H
Line pressure solenoid valve
Manual mode switch signal CONSULT communication line
A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Stop lamp switch signal Duet-EA control
Starter relay
Input speed sensor CAN system
Back-up lamp relay
ATF pressure switch I
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Without Manual Mode J
JSDIA1974GB
AT-37
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
With Manual Mode
JSDIA1735GB
CAN Communication INFOID:0000000005443610
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-46,
"CAN System Specification Chart".
AT-38
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Input/Output Signal of TCM INFOID:0000000005443611
Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

Shift Lock-up function
Control item pressure speed brake nostics B
control control (*3)
control control control function
Accelerator pedal position signal(*5) X X X X X X X

Output speed sensor X X X X X X X AT
Vehicle speed signal (combination
X
meter)(*1)(*5)
D
Closed throttle position signal(*5) X (*2) X X X X (*4)
Wide open throttle position signal(*5) X X (*4)

Input speed sensor 1 X X X X X E
Input
Input speed sensor 2
X X X X X
(for 4th speed only)
Engine speed signals(*5) X X X X X X X F
Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X X X (*4)

A/T fluid temperature sensors X X X X X X G
Operation signal(*5) X X X
ASCD
Overdrive cancel signal(*5) X
H
Direct clutch solenoid X X X X
Input clutch solenoid X X X X
High and low reverse clutch solenoid X X X X I
Front brake solenoid X X X X
Output Low coast brake solenoid
X X X X X J
(ATF pressure switch 2)
Line pressure solenoid X X X X X X X
TCC solenoid X X X
K
Self-diagnosis table(*6) X
Starter relay X X
*1: Spare for output speed sensor
L
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnosis; if self-diagnosis are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error. M
*5: Input by CAN communications.
*6: Output by CAN communications.
N
Line Pressure Control INFOID:0000000005443612
• When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid. O
AT-39
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
• This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres-
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving
state.
PCIA0007E
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PAT-
TERN
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
PCIA0008E
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)

When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.
PCIA0009E
During Shift Change
AT-40
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input A
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is
set according to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
B
AT
G
PCIA0010E
At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera- H
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
I
PCIA0011E K
Shift Control INFOID:0000000005443613
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the L
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained. M
PCIA0012E
P
SHIFT CHANGE
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.
Shift Change System Diagram
AT-41
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
PCIA0013E
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
Lock-up Control INFOID:0000000005443614
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up Operation Condition Table (For YD25DDTi Engine Models)
selector lever D position M position
Gear position 5 4 3 2 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × × × – × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × – × × × ×
Lock-up Operation Condition Table [For VQ40DE Engine Models (With Manual Mode)]
selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 5 4 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × – × × × ×
Lock-up Operation Condition Table [For VQ40DE Engine Models (Without Manual Mode)]
selector lever “D” position “3” position “2” position
Gear position 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × – – –
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL

Lock-up Control System Diagram
PCIA0014E
AT-42
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Lock-up Released
In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the A
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied B
In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque
converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. AT
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the D
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-clutched State
The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to gradually increase the E
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
F
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half- G
clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low
degree of opening.
H
Engine Brake Control INFOID:0000000005443615
• The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling. I
Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and
the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally.
J
SCIA1520E O
• The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls the
coupling and releasing of the low coast brake.
The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force.
P
Control Valve INFOID:0000000005443616
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE
AT-43
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Name Function
In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive, the
Torque converter regulator valve
line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pressure).
Pressure regulator valve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for the
Pressure regulator plug
driving state.
Pressure regulator sleeve
When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (front
Front brake control valve brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, and 5GR, adjusts
the clutch pressure.)
Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston and
Accumulator control valve
low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for
Pilot valve A
line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for
Pilot valve B
shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve.
When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Low coast brake reducing valve
(low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected.
Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4GR and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity.
When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum
High and low reverse clutch control valve pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low reverse
clutch. (In 1GR, 3GR, 4GR and 5GR, adjusts the clutch pressure.)
When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (input
Input clutch control valve clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4GR and 5GR, adjusts the clutch
pressure.)
When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (direct
Direct clutch control valve clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2GR, 3GR, and 4GR, adjusts the
clutch pressure.)
TCC control valve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation
TCC control plug
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
TCC control sleeve
Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system oil
Torque converter lubrication valve
path.
Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit.
N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected.
Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which
Manual valve
the line pressure is not sent drain.
FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH
Name Function
Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunc-
ATF pressure switch 2 (LC/B)
tion, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
AT-44
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM (FOR TYPE 2)
A
Introduction INFOID:0000000005443617
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. B

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with
the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the
ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is AT
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For detail,
refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
D
OBD Function for A/T System INFOID:0000000005443618
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the A/T system. One function is
to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM E
when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnos-
tic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and
solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
F
The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
tion to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD INFOID:0000000005443619
G
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in H
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC I
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd trip
J
The “Trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) INFOID:0000000005443620
K
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. L
( with CONSULT or GST) CONSULT or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
(CONSULT also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. M
• Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or
occurred in the past and returned to normal. N
CONSULT can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT (if available) is recommended.
- DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE”
with CONSULT. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a
O
DTC.
- If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
- If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
P
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen, not on the GST.
AT-45
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
• If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
• When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD. For details, refer to EC-553, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information".
• Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT)

The emission related diagnostic information in the TCM and ECM can be erased by selecting “All Erase” in the
“Description” of “FINAL CHECK” mode with CONSULT.
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “Erase Self-diagnosis”. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". (The engine
warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “How to Erase DTC (With GST)”. Refer to EC-53, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (for
VQ40DE engine TYPE 1) or EC-941, "Diagnosis Description" (for YD25DDTi engine).
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “Erase Self-diagnosis”. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". (The engine
warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “How to Erase DTC (No Tool)”. Refer to EC-53, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (for
VQ40DE engine TYPE 1) or EC-941, "Diagnosis Description" (for YD25DDTi engine).
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000005443621
DESCRIPTION
AT-46
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with- A
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
• If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-28, or see EC-907.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. B
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
AT
SEF217U
AT-47
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005443622
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005443623
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is an error in a
main electronic control input/output signal circuit. In fail-safe mode A/T is fixed in 2GR, 4GR or 5GR (depend-
ing on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”.
Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the
brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe
mode. If this happens, switch OFF the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it ON again to return to the
normal shift pattern. Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to “WORK
FLOW” (Refer to AT-49, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair").
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to mark driving possible.
Output Speed Sensor
Signals are input from two systems - from output speed sensor installed on the transmission and from combi-
nation meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in one of the systems. And if output
speed sensor has unusual cases, 5GR is prohibited.
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according
to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems,
the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
Throttle Position Sensor (VQ40DE Model Only)
If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according
to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems,
the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based on input indi-
cating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order to make driving
possible.
Transmission Range Switch
In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched “OFF”, the
starter relay is switched “OFF” (starter starting is disabled), the back-up lamp relay switched “OFF” (back-up
lamp is OFF) and the position is fixed to the “D” range to make driving possible.
Starter Relay
The starter relay is switched OFF. (Starter starting is disabled.)
A/T Interlock
• If there is an interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2GR to make driving possible.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is
not a input speed sensor malfunction.
• When interlock is detected at the 3GR or more, it is locked at the 2GR.
1st Engine Braking
When there is an 1st engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is switched “OFF” to
avoid the engine brake operation.
AT-48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Line Pressure Solenoid
The solenoid is switched OFF and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make driving A
possible.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
The solenoid is switched OFF to release the lock-up. B
Low Coast Brake Solenoid
When a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs, in order to make driving possible. If the solenoid is ON,
the A/T is held in 2GR. If the solenoid is OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR. (Engine brake is not applied in 1GR and AT
2GR.)
Input Clutch Solenoid
If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR to D
make driving possible.
Direct Clutch Solenoid
E
If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR to
Front Brake Solenoid
F
If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid ON, in order to make driving possible, the A/
T is held in 5GR. If the solenoid is OFF, the A/T 4GR.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
G
If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR to
Input Speed Sensor 1 or 2 H
The control is the same as if there were no input speed sensors, 5GR is prohibited.
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair INFOID:0000000005443624
I
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the output speed sensor, accelera-
tor pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) or transmission J
range switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T
solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
K
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
functions in its memory. (For TYPE 2) L
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
SAT631IB
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc- M
tion, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermit-

N
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts. O
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT (or GST*) or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the "WORK FLOW". P
*
: TYPE 2 only.
SAT632I
AT-49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” as
shown on the example (Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET")
should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
SEF234G
WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp-
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, "Information from Customer" and "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart", to
perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart
AT-50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
For Type 1
A
AT
L
SCIA7851E
*1. "Information from Customer" *2. "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart" *3. AT-48 M
*4. AT-58 *5. AT-58 *6. AT-58
*7. AT-97 *8. AT-106 *9. AT-109
*10. AT-173 *11. AT-190 *12. AT-69 N
*13. AT-97 *14. AT-106 *15. AT-109
*16. AT-173
O
AT-51
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
For Type 2
SCIA7146E
*1. "Information from Customer" *2. "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart" *3. AT-48
*4. AT-58 *5. AT-58 *6. AT-58
*7. AT-97 *8. AT-97 *9. AT-48
*10. AT-109 *11. AT-173 *12. AT-190
*13. AT-69 *14. AT-45 *15. AT-109
*16. AT-173 *17. EC-553
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information from Customer
KEY POINTS
• WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model
• WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
• WHERE..... Road conditions
• HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
AT-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN A

Trans. Model Engine Mileage
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency Continuous Intermittent (times a day)
B
Symptoms Vehicle does not move. ( Any position Particular position)

No up-shift ( 1st → 2nd 2nd → 3rd 3rd → 4th 4th → 5th) AT
No down-shift ( 5th → 4th 4th → 3rd 3rd → 2nd 2nd → 1st)
Lock-up malfunction
Shift point too high or too low. D
Shift shock or slip ( N → D Lock-up Any drive position)
Noise or vibration
E
No kick down
No pattern select
Others F
( )
A/T CHECK indicator lamp Continuously lit Not lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)* Continuously lit Not lit G
*: Type 2 only
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart H
1 Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-48
A/T fluid inspection I
2
Leak (Repair leak location.)
Stall test and line pressure test AT-58
Stall test
J
Torque converter one-way clutch

1st one-way clutch
Front brake
3rd one-way clutch K
3 High and low reverse clutch
Engine
Low coast brake
Line pressure low
Forward brake
Except for input clutch and direct
Reverse brake
clutch, clutches and brakes OK L
Forward one-way clutch
Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:
AT-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-61
Check Before Engine Is Started AT-61
AT-193, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On"
Perform self-diagnosis. Enter checks for detected items. AT-97, AT-106
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE AT-109
DTC P0615 STARTER RELAY AT-112
DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL AT-116
DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A AT-117
DTC P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A AT-121
DTC P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AT-123
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED AT-128
DTC P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-130
4-1 DTC P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-142
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-145
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A AT-149
DTC P1705 TP SENSOR AT-151
DTC P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AT-153
DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL AT-157
DTC P1730 INTERLOCK AT-159
DTC P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING AT-161
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-163
4
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID AT-165
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-167
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-169
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID AT-171
DTC P1815 M-MODE SWITCH AT-175
Check at Idle AT-61
AT-193, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position"
AT-194, "In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed"
4-2 AT-194, "In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves"
AT-195, "Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position)"
AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position"
AT-199, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" Position"
Cruise Test AT-61
Part 1
AT-200, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1"
AT-202, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2"
4-3
AT-209, "A/T Does Not Lock-up"
AT-210, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition"
AT-211, "Lock-up Is Not Released"
AT-212, "Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle"
AT-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Part 2 AT-61
A
AT-200, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1"
AT-205, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3→ D4" B
Part 3 AT-61
AT-213, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5GR → 4GR"
AT-214, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4GR → 3GR" AT
AT-218, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake"
Perform self-diagnosis. Enter checks for detected items. AT-97, AT-106 D
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE AT-109
DTC P0615 STARTER RELAY AT-112
DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL AT-116 E
DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A AT-117
DTC P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A AT-121
DTC P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AT-123
4 4-3 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED AT-128 F
DTC P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-139 G
H
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A AT-149
DTC P1705 TP SENSOR AT-151
DTC P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AT-153
DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL AT-157 I
DTC P1730 INTERLOCK AT-159
DTC P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING AT-161
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-163
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID AT-165 J
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-167
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-169
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID AT-173 K
DTC P1815 M-MODE SWITCH AT-175
5 Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnosis and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6 Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-58 L
For any remaining NG items, perform the “Diagnosis Procedure” and repair or replace the malfunctioning AT-69
7 parts. See the chart for diagnosis by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection pro-
cedures.) M
AT-97, EC-
53 (for
VQ40DE N
engine
8 Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from TCM and ECM*. TYPE 1)*,
EC-941 (for
YD25DDTi O
engine)*
*: TYPE 2 only.
P
AT-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location INFOID:0000000005443625
Without Manual Mode
JSDIA1983GB
AT-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
With Manual Mode
A
AT
JSDIA1911GB
AT-57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000005443626
JMCWA0073GB
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000005443627
STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
AT-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/ A
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
B
AT
SAT647B
D
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” E
position.
SAT513G
H
5. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot I
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test. J
Stall speed
YD25DDTi: 2,800 - 3,200 rpm K
SAT514G
VQ40DE: 2,200 - 2,500 rpm
7. Move selector lever to the “N” position. L
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute. M
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” positions.
Judgment of Stall Test
N
Selector lever position
Expected problem location
D R
• Forward brake O
• Forward one-way clutch
H O
• 1st one-way clutch
• 3rd one-way clutch
Stall rotation P
O H • Reverse brake
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
AT-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Stall test standard value position
Does not shift-up “D” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR or 5GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR Front brake slippage
LINE PRESSURE TEST

Line Pressure Test Port
SCIA2187E
Line Pressure Test Procedure

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the ATF reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F), then inspect the amount of ATF and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The A/T fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving.
3. After warming up remove the oil pressure detection plug and
install the oil pressure gauge (ST2505S001).
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use O-ring
attached to the oil pressure detection plug.
SCIA0574E
SAT513G
AT-60
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed. A
CAUTION:
• Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
B
• When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed.
Refer to "STALL TEST".
6. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to AT- AT
267, "Component".
CAUTION: SAT493G
• Do not reuse O-ring. D
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
Line Pressure
E
2
Line pressure [kPa (bar, kg/cm , psi)]
Engine speed
“R” position “D” position
At idle speed 425 - 465 (4.3 - 4.6, 4.3 - 4.7, 62 - 67) 379 - 428 (3.8 - 4.3, 3.9 - 4.4, 55 - 62)
F
At stall speed 1,605 - 1,950 (16.0 - 19.5, 16.4 - 19.9, 233 - 283) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.1 - 15.0, 13.4 - 15.3, 190 - 218)
Judgment of Line Pressure Test G
Judgment Possible cause

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output. H
For example
Low for all positions • Oil pump wear
(“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) • Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
• Oil strainer ⇒ oil pump ⇒ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak I
• Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a specific Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
Idle speed position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve. J
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment
function.
For example K
High • Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
• A/T fluid temperature sensor malfunction
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter clog, cut line)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking L
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment func-
tion.
For example
Oil pressure does not M
• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
rise higher than the oil
• TCM malfunction
pressure for idle.
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON state)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking N
• Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Stall speed Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the
pressure adjustment function.
The pressure rises, but For example
O
does not enter the stan- • Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
dard position. • Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking P
• Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Only low for a specific Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
Road Test INFOID:0000000005443628
DESCRIPTION
AT-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
• The road test inspects overall performance of A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.
• The road test is perform in the following three stages.
1. Check before engine is started.
2. Check at idle.
3. Cruise test.
• Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3.
• Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items.
• Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Include NG items in “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”
(Refer to AT-49). Perform a diagnosis of the NG items after the completion of all the road tests.
CHECK BEFORE ENGINE STARTED
1.CHECK A/T CHECI INDICATOR
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
YES-1 >> With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT and record all
NG items on “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”.
3. Go to “CHECK AT IDLE”.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT
2. Perform the self-diagnosis and record all NG items on “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”. Refer to
AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT".
3. Go to “CHECK AT IDLE”.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-193, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On".
CHECK AT IDLE
1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
4. Start the engine.
Does the engine start?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-193, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position".
2.CHECK VEHICLE EQUIPMENT
Is vehicle equipped with manual mode shifter?
YES or NO?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE (WITH MANUAL MODE)
2. Move selector lever in “D”, “M” or “R” position.
Does the engine start in any positions?
YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-193, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position".
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE (WITHOUT MANUAL MODE)
2. Move selector lever in “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.
AT-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Does the engine start in any positions?
YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-193, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position". A
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
B
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward. AT
5. Engage the parking brake.
When you push the vehicle with the parking brake released, does it move?
YES >> Enter a check mark at AT-194, "In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed" on “Diagnostic D
Worksheet Chart”, GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS E

2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Release the parking brake. F
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Enter a check mark at AT-194, "In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves" on “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”,
G
GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK H
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
When the A/T is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock? I
YES >> Enter a check mark at AT-195, "Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position)" on “Diagnostic Worksheet
Chart”the diagnosis worksheet, GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 8. J
8.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position. K
3. Release the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.
Does the vehicle creep backward?
YES >> GO TO 9. L
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position" on “Diagnostic
Worksheet Chart”, GO TO 7.
9.CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS M
Inspect whether the vehicle creep forward when the A/T is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle creep forward in “D” position? N
YES >> Go to “CRUISE TEST-PART 1”.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-199, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" Position" on “Diagnostic
Worksheet Chart”, then continue the road test. Go to “CRUISE TEST-PART 1”.
O
CRUISE TEST-PART 1
1.CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1
P
1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and ATF.
Appropriate temperature for the ATF: 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
6. Press accelerator pedal about half-way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT
AT-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Read the value of “GEAR” with “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Starts from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-200, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1" on “Diagnostic Worksheet
Chart”, GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press down accelerator pedal about half-way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate
speed. Refer to AT-67, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs".
With CONSULT
Read the value of “GEAR”, “ACCELE POS”I and “VEHICLE SPEED” with “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-202, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2" on “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”,
GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
YES >> GO TO 4.
GO TO 4.
With CONSULT
YES >> GO TO 5.
GO TO 5.
With CONSULT
YES >> GO TO 6.
GO TO 6.
6.CHECK LOCK-UP
When releasing accelerator pedal (closed throttle position signal: OFF) from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
Refer to AT-68, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases".
With CONSULT
Read the value of “TCC SOLENOID” with “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function
(TRANSMISSION)".
Does it lock-up?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-209, "A/T Does Not Lock-up" on “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”, GO TO
7.
AT-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7.CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD A

Check hold lock-up.
With CONSULT
Read the value of “TCC SOLENOID” with “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function B
(TRANSMISSION)".
Does it maintain lock-up status?
YES >> GO TO 8. AT
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-210, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" on “Diagnostic Worksheet
Chart”, GO TO 8.
8.CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE D
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT
Read the value of “TCC SOLENOID” with “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function E
(TRANSMISSION)".
Does lock-up cancel?
YES >> GO TO 9. F
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-211, "Lock-up Is Not Released" on “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”, GO
TO 9.
9.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4 G
Decelerate by pressing lightly on brake pedal.

With CONSULT H
Read the value of “GEAR” and “ENGINE SPEED” with “DATA MONITOR” mode.
When the A/T shift-down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. I
2. Go to “CRUISE TEST-PART 2”.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-212, "Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle" on “Diagnostic Worksheet
Chart”, then continue the road test. Go to “CRUISE TEST-PART 2”.
J
CRUISE TEST-PART 2
1.CHECK STARTING FROM D1
K
2. Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT L
Does it start from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2. M
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-200, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1" on “Diagnostic Worksheet
Chart”, GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 N
Press accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the A/T shifts up (D1 → D2) at the correct
With CONSULT O
Read the value of “GEAR”, “ACCELE POSI” and “VEHICLE SPEED” with “DATA MONITOR” mode.
YES >> GO TO 3. P
GO TO 3.
Press accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the A/T shifts up (D2 → D3) at the correct
With CONSULT
AT-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Read the value of “GEAR”, “ACCELE POSI” and “VEHICLE SPEED” with “DATA MONITOR” mode.
YES >> GO TO 4.
GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE
When the A/T changes speed D3 → D4, return accelerator pedal.
With CONSULT
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to “CRUISE TEST-PART 3”.
then continue the road test. Go to “CRUISE TEST-PART 3”.
CRUISE TEST-PART 3
1.CHECK VEHICLE EQUIPMENT
Is vehicle equipped with manual mode shifter?
YES or NO?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE FUNCTION (WITH MANUAL MODE)
Move to manual mode from “D” position.
Does it switch to manual mode?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Continue road test and add chicanery to AT-220, "Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode" on “Diag-
nostic Worksheet Chart”, GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (WITH MANUAL MODE)
During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
With CONSULT
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd,
3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”, GO TO 6.
4.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (WITHOUT MANUAL MODE)
1. Push overdrive control switch. (OD OFF indicator lamp is off.)
2. Confirm gear selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle using half throttle to D5.
4. Release accelerator pedal.
5. Push overdrive control switch. (OD OFF indicator lamp is on.) while driving in D5.
With CONSULT
Does A/T shift from D5 to D4 (OD OFF)?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-213, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5GR → 4GR" on the “Diagnostic Worksheet
Chart”, GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (WITHOUT MANUAL MODE)
During D4 driving, is downshift from “D” → “3” → “2” → “1” performed?
With CONSULT
AT-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 6. A
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift” at the corresponding position (4th → 3rd, 3rd → 2nd,
2nd → 1st) on the “Diagnostic Worksheet Chart”, GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE B
Check engine brake.
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position (With manual mode) or 11 position (Without man-
AT
ual mode)?
YES - 1>> With CONSULT
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “TRANSMISSION”. D
YES - 2>> Without CONSULT
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". E
NO - 1 >> With CONSULT
1. Enter a check mark at AT-218, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake" on the “Diag-
nostic Worksheet Chart”.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “TRANSMISSION”. F
NO - 2 >> Without CONSULT
1. Enter a check mark at AT-218, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake" on the “Diag-
nostic Worksheet Chart”. G
2. Perform self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT".
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000006135051
H
2WD MODELS
Engine model YD25DDTi I

Vehicle speed [km/h (MPH)]
Throttle position
D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D4 D4 → D5 D5 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1
J
41 - 45 65 - 73 107 - 117 158 - 168 154 - 164 97 - 107 50 - 58 19 - 23
Full throttle
(25 - 28) (41 - 46) (67 - 73) (99 - 105) (96 - 103) (61 - 67) (31 - 38) (12 - 14)
30 - 34 48 - 52 73 - 81 105 - 113 58 - 66 41 - 49 23 - 29 8 - 12 K
Half throttle
(19 - 21) (29 - 33) (46 - 51) (66 - 71) (36 - 41) (26 - 31) (14 - 18) (5 - 8)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
L
Engine model VQ40DE
Throttle position
D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D4 D4 → D5 D5 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 M
62 - 66 100 - 108 156 - 166 241 - 251 237 - 247 145 - 155 88 - 96 42 - 46
Full throttle
(39 - 41) (63 - 68) (98 - 104) (151 - 157) (148 - 154) (91 - 97) (55 - 60) (26 - 29)
50 - 54 82 - 88 126 - 134 153 - 161 117 - 125 71 - 79 50 - 56 11 - 15 N
Half throttle
(31 - 34) (51 - 55) (79 - 84) (96 - 101) (73 - 78) (44 - 49) (31 - 35) (7 - 9)
O
4WD MODELS
Engine model YD25DDTi

P
Throttle position
38 - 42 61 - 69 101 - 111 149 - 159 145 - 155 92 - 102 47 - 55 18 - 22
Full throttle
(24 - 26) (38 - 43) (63 - 69) (93 - 99) (91 - 97) (58 - 64) (29 - 34) (11 - 14)
28 - 32 43 - 49 69 - 77 99 - 107 55 - 63 41 - 49 23 - 29 8 - 12
Half throttle
(18 - 20) (27 - 31) (43 - 48) (62 - 67) (34 - 39) (26 - 31) (14 - 18) (5 - 8)
AT-67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine model VQ40DE
Throttle Vehicle speed [km/h (MPH)]

Tire size
position D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D4 D4 → D5 D5 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1
Full 55 - 59 89 - 97 138 - 148 214 - 224 210 - 220 128 - 138 77 - 85 36 - 40
throttle (34 - 37) (56 - 61) (86 - 93) (134 - 140) (131 - 138) (80 - 86) (48 - 53) (23 - 25)
235/70 R16
Half 44 - 48 72 - 78 112 - 120 136 - 144 104 - 112 63 - 71 45 - 51 11 - 15
throttle (28 - 30) (45 - 49) (70 - 75) (85 - 90) (65 - 70) (39 - 44) (28 - 32) (7 - 9)
Full 59 - 63 95 - 103 147 - 157 228 - 238 224 - 234 137 - 147 83 - 91 40 - 44
255/70 R16 throttle (37 - 39) (59 - 64) (92 - 98) (143 - 149) (140 - 146) (86 - 92) (52 - 57) (25 - 28)
255/65 R17 Half 47 - 51 77 - 83 119 - 127 144 - 152 111 - 119 67 - 75 48 - 54 11 - 15
throttle (29 - 32) (48 - 52) (74 - 79) (90 - 95) (69 - 74) (42 - 47) (30 - 34) (7 - 9)
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000006135052
2WD MODELS

Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 29 - 37 (18 - 23) 26 - 34 (16 - 21)
Half throttle 128 - 136 (80 - 85) 109 - 117 (68 - 73)
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
Engine model VQ40DE

Throttle position
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
Closed throttle 68 - 76 (43 - 48) 65 - 73 (41 - 46)
Half throttle 194 - 202 (121 - 126) 151 - 159 (94 - 99)
4WD MODELS

Throttle position
Closed throttle 27 - 35 (17 - 21) 24 - 32 (15 - 20)
Half throttle 121 - 129 (75 - 80) 103 - 111 (64 - 69)
Engine model VQ40DE

Tire size Throttle position
Closed throttle 60 - 68 (37 - 42) 57 - 65 (36 - 41)
235/70 R16
Half throttle 173 - 181 (108 - 113) 134 - 142 (84 - 89)
AT-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine model VQ40DE
A
255/70 R16 Closed throttle 64 - 72 (40 - 45) 61 - 69 (38 - 43) B

255/65 R17 Half throttle 184 - 192 (115 - 120) 143 - 151 (89 - 94)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. AT
Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000005443631
• The diagnostic item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1. D
• Overhaul and inspect inside the A/T only if A/T fluid condition is NG. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections
Before Trouble Diagnosis".
E
AT-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
EC-1036
(for
YD25DDTi
engine),
EC-76 (for
VQ40DE
1. Engine idle speed engine
type 1*) or
EC-560
(for
VQ40DE
engine
type 2*)
ON vehicle
Large shock. (“N”→“D” 2. Engine speed signal AT-128
position) 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151
1 Refer to AT-195,
"Large Shock ("N" to 4. A/T position AT-225
"D" Position)". 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-153
6. Front brake solenoid valve AT-165
7. CAN communication line AT-109
8. A/T fluid leakage —
Shift
Shock 9. Line pressure test AT-58
10. Control valve with TCM AT-233
11. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to
perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21, "Cross-
Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23, "Cross-
OFF vehicle AT-283
Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD)", AT-22, "Cross-
Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24,
"Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151
2. A/T position AT-225
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-167
Shock is too large 5. Engine speed signal AT-128

ON vehicle
2 when changing 6. Input speed sensor AT-121
D1→D2.
AT-123,
7. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
AT-157
OFF vehicle 10. Direct clutch AT-319
AT-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-169
Shock is too large 5. Engine speed signal AT-128 AT

ON vehicle
3 when changing 6. Input speed sensor AT-121
D2→D3.
AT-123,
AT-157 D
E
OFF vehicle 10. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
2. A/T position AT-225 F
3. Input clutch solenoid valve AT-163
5. Engine speed signal AT-128
G
Shock is too large ON vehicle
4 Shift when changing 6. Input speed sensor AT-121
Shock D3→D4.
AT-123, H
AT-157
9. Control valve with TCM AT-233 I
OFF vehicle 10. Input clutch AT-305
J
4. CAN communication line AT-109 K
ON vehicle
Shock is too large
6. Input speed sensor AT-121
5 when changing
D4→D5. AT-123, L
AT-157
M
10. Front brake (brake band) AT-267

OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch AT-305 N
AT-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle 5. Input speed sensor AT-121
Shock is too large for AT-123,
downshift when accel- 6. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
6 AT-157
erator pedal is
pressed. 7. A/T fluid leakage —
10. Input clutch AT-305
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
12. Direct clutch AT-319
Shift
Shock Shock is too large for AT-123,
7 upshift when accelera- AT-157
tor pedal is released. 7. A/T fluid leakage —
OFF vehicle
Shock is too large for ON vehicle
8 AT-123,
lock-up. 6. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
AT-157
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145
OFF vehicle 10. Torque converter AT-283
AT-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line AT-109
Shift Shock is too large dur-
9 5. Control valve with TCM AT-233 AT
Shock ing engine brake.
OFF vehicle D
1. A/T fluid leakage — E
AT-123,
AT-157
Gear does not change
from D1→D2. ON vehicle 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-167 F
10 Refer to AT-202, "A/T
4. Line pressure test AT-58
Does Not Shift: D1→
D2". 5. CAN communication line AT-109
G

1. A/T fluid leakage — H
AT-123,
AT-157
from D2→D3. ON vehicle 3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-169 I
11
No Up Refer to AT-204, "A/T
Shift Does Not Shift: D2→
D3". 5. CAN communication line AT-109
J
1. A/T fluid leakage — K
AT-123,
AT-157
Gear does not change 3. Input clutch solenoid valve AT-163 L
from D3→D4. ON vehicle
12 Refer to AT-205, "A/T 4. Front brake solenoid valve AT-165
Does Not Shift: D3→ 5. Line pressure test AT-58
D4". M
OFF vehicle 8. Input clutch AT-305 N
AT-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
2. Overdrive control switch AT-187
AT-123,
AT-157
ON vehicle
from D4→D5. 5. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-167
No Up
13 Refer to AT-207, "A/T
Shift 6. Input speed sensor AT-121
Does Not Shift: D4→
D5". 7. Line pressure test AT-58
OFF vehicle
• In “D” or “M” position, AT-123,
does not downshift AT-157
to 4GR. (With manu-
al mode)
ON vehicle
• In “D” position, does 4. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-167
14 not downshift to
4GR. (Without man-
ual mode) 6. Line pressure test AT-58
Refer to AT-213, "A/T
Does Not Shift: 5GR →
4GR". 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-283
No Down OFF vehicle
Shift
• In “D” or “M” position,
does not downshift AT-123,
to 3GR. (With manu- AT-157
al mode) 3. Input clutch solenoid valve AT-163
• In “D” or “3” position, ON vehicle
15 does not downshift 4. Front brake solenoid valve AT-165
to 3GR. (Without 5. CAN communication line AT-109
manual mode)
Refer to AT-214, "A/T 6. Line pressure test AT-58
Does Not Shift: 4GR → 7. Control valve with TCM AT-233
3GR".
AT-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
• In “D” or “M” position, 1. A/T fluid leakage —
does not downshift
AT-123,
to 2GR. (With manu- 2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal B
AT-157
al mode)
• In “D” or “2” position, ON vehicle 3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-169
16 does not downshift
to 2GR. (Without AT
manual mode) 5. Line pressure test AT-58
Refer to AT-216, "A/T 6. Control valve with TCM AT-233
No Down 2GR". OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch AT-317 D
Shift • In “D” or “M” position, 1. A/T fluid leakage —
does not downshift
AT-123,
to 1GR. (With manu- 2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal E
AT-157
al mode)
• In “D” or “1” position, ON vehicle 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-167
17 does not downshift
to 1GR. (Without F
manual mode) 5. Line pressure test AT-58
Refer to AT-217, "A/T 6. Control valve with TCM AT-233
1GR". OFF vehicle 7. Direct clutch AT-319 G
AT-123,
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal H
AT-157
ON vehicle 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-167

I
7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303 J
8. 1st one-way clutch AT-311
Slips/Will 9. Gear system AT-267
When “D” position, re- K
18 Not En-
mains in 1GR. 10. Reverse brake AT-283
gage
11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21, L
"Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23,
OFF vehicle AT-283
"Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD)", AT-22,
"Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24,
"Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".) M
AT-283 N
O
AT-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-123,
AT-157
ON vehicle 3. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-171

When “D” position, re-
19 7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303
mains in 2GR.
8. Gear system AT-267
OFF vehicle 10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to
AT-283
Slips/Will
Not En- AT-123,
gage AT-157
ON vehicle
6. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303
When “D” position, re- 8. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
20 mains in 3GR.
possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21,
AT-283
OFF vehicle
AT-283
AT-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
AT-123,
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal B
AT-157
AT
ON vehicle 5. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-169
6. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-171
When “D” position, re- 7. Front brake solenoid valve AT-165 D
21
mains in 4GR.
E
Slips/Will 12. Gear system AT-267 F
Not En- OFF vehicle
gage 13. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
G
AT-123,
AT-157
H
ON vehicle 3. Front brake solenoid valve AT-165
When “D” position, re- 5. CAN communication line AT-109
22 I
mains in 5GR.
J
OFF vehicle
10. High and low reverse clutch AT-317 K
AT-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-58
6. Torque converter AT-283
7. Oil pump assembly AT-301
Vehicle cannot be 9. 1st one-way clutch AT-311
started from D1.
23 Refer to AT-200, "Vehi-
cle Cannot Be Started 11. Reverse brake AT-283
from D1". 12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
OFF vehicle possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21,
AT-283
Slips/Will "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD)", AT-22,
Not En- "Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24,
gage "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".)
AT-283
Does not lock-up.
24 Refer to AT-209, "A/T 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145
Does Not Lock-up".
OFF vehicle
AT-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
Does not hold lock-up
condition.
25 Refer to AT-210, "A/T 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145 AT
Does Not Hold Lock-up
Condition".
D
OFF vehicle
Lock-up is not re- ON vehicle 4. Input speed sensor AT-121 F
leased.
26 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145
Refer to AT-211, "Lock-
up Is Not Released". 6. CAN communication line AT-109
G
Slips/Will 8. Torque converter AT-283
Not En- OFF vehicle
gage 9. Oil pump assembly AT-301 H
AT-123,
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal I
AT-157

J
No shock at all or the 7. Torque converter AT-283 K
clutch slips when vehi-
27 8. Oil pump assembly AT-301
cle changes speed
D1→D2. 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303
L

12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to M
AT-283
Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24, N
AT-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-123,
AT-157
ON vehicle 3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-169

No shock at all or the 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303
28 10. Gear system AT-267
cle changes speed
D2→D3. 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
OFF vehicle "Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23,
AT-283
Slips/Will 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to
Not En- perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21, "Cross-
gage Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23, "Cross-
AT-283
AT-123,
AT-157
ON vehicle
No shock at all or the
29
cle changes speed 7. Control valve with TCM AT-233
D3→D4.
OFF vehicle
AT-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
AT-123,
AT-157
ON vehicle
AT
No shock at all or the
30
cle changes speed 7. Control valve with TCM AT-233 D
D4→D5.
E
OFF vehicle
12. Gear system AT-267 F
Slips/Will 13. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
Not En-
gage 1. A/T fluid leakage —
AT-123,
G
AT-157
ON vehicle H
When you press the
accelerator pedal and 6. Line pressure test AT-58 I
31 shift speed D5→D4 the
engine idles or the A/T
slips. 8. Torque converter AT-283
J
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system AT-267 K
L
AT-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-123,
AT-157
ON vehicle
When you press the 9. Oil pump assembly AT-301

accelerator pedal and 10. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303
engine idles or the A/T 11. Gear system AT-267
slips. 12. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
AT-283
Slips/Will
Not En- AT-283
gage
AT-123,
AT-157
ON vehicle
When you press the 7. Control valve with TCM AT-233
accelerator pedal and
engine idles or the A/T 9. Oil pump assembly AT-301
slips.

AT-283
AT-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
AT-123,
AT-157

AT
7. Torque converter AT-283 D
When you press the 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303

E
Slips/Will accelerator pedal and 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-311
34 Not En- shift speed D2→D1 the
gage engine idles or the A/T 11. Gear system AT-267
slips. 12. Reverse brake AT-283 F
AT-283 G
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to H
AT-283
I
AT-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-109
5. Transmission range switch AT-117
With selector lever in 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-311

35 “D” position, accelera- 11. Gear system AT-267
tion is extremely poor.
12. Reverse brake AT-283
AT-283
Slips/Will "Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24,
Not En- "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".)
gage
AT-283
ON vehicle
With selector lever in
36 “R” position, accelera- 6. Transmission range switch AT-117
tion is extremely poor.
OFF vehicle 10. Output shaft AT-283
AT-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151
5. Control valve with TCM AT-233 AT
D
While starting off by ac-
celerating in 1GR, en- 10. Gear system AT-267 E
37
gine races or slippage
occurs.
OFF vehicle possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21, F
AT-283
"Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".) G
Slips/Will
Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23, "Cross- H
Not En- AT-283
gage
I
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151 J
ON vehicle
6. Control valve with TCM AT-233 K
While accelerating in
38 2GR, engine races or 8. Oil pump assembly AT-301
L
slippage occurs. 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-303
OFF vehicle 11. Direct clutch AT-319 M

Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23, "Cross- N
AT-283
Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".)
O
AT-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle
While accelerating in
39 3GR, engine races or
slippage occurs. 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
AT-283
Slips/Will
Not En- 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to
gage perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21, "Cross-
AT-283
Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".)
ON vehicle
While accelerating in 6. Control valve with TCM AT-233
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter AT-283
OFF vehicle
AT-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle
5. Front brake solenoid valve AT-165 AT
While accelerating in 6. Control valve with TCM AT-233
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter AT-283
D
OFF vehicle
10. Input clutch AT-305 E
Slips/Will
Not En- 11. Gear system AT-267
gage
1. A/T fluid leakage — F
G
42 Slips at lock-up. 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145
6. CAN communication line AT-109 H
OFF vehicle I
AT-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve 0AT-167
ON vehicle
No creep at all. 10. Oil pump assembly AT-301
Refer to AT-197, "Vehi-
cle Does Not Creep 11. 1st one-way clutch AT-311
43 Backward in "R" Posi- 12. Gear system AT-267
tion", AT-199, "Vehicle
Does Not Creep For- 13. Reverse brake AT-283
ward in "D" Position" 14. Direct clutch AT-319
Slips/Will 15. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
Not En- OFF vehicle possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21,
gage "Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23,
AT-283
AT-283
ON vehicle 3. Transmission range switch AT-117
Vehicle cannot run in 4. A/T position AT-225

44
all positions. 5. Control valve with TCM AT-233
OFF vehicle 7. Gear system AT-267
8. Output shaft AT-283
AT-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
5. Control valve with TCM AT-233 AT
D
With selector lever in 9. Gear system AT-267

45 “D” position, driving is 10. Reverse brake AT-283 E
not possible.
AT-283 F
Slips/Will "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD)", AT-22,
Not En- "Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24,
gage "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".)
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to G
AT-283
Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24, H
I
With selector lever in 4. A/T position AT-225
46 “R” position, driving is J
not possible. 5. Control valve with TCM AT-233
OFF vehicle 7. Output shaft AT-283 K
L
Does not change
M5→M4. (With manual 3. A/T position AT-225
47 mode) ON vehicle
4. Manual mode switch AT-175 M
Does Not Shift: 5GR → 5. CAN communication line AT-109
4GR".
N
OFF vehicle 7. Front brake (brake band) AT-283
Does Not
Change
2. A/T fluid leakage — O
Does not change 3. A/T position AT-225
ON vehicle
M4→M3. (With manual
mode) 4. Manual mode switch AT-175
48 P
Refer to AT-214, "A/T 5. CAN communication line AT-109
3GR". 6. Control valve with TCM AT-233
OFF vehicle
AT-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle 3. A/T position AT-225

Does not change
M3→M2. (With manual 4. Manual mode switch AT-175
mode)
49 5. CAN communication line AT-109
2GR".
Does Not
Change ON vehicle 3. A/T position AT-225
Does not change
M2→M1. (With manual 4. Manual mode switch AT-175
mode)
1GR".
Cannot be changed to 1. Manual mode switch AT-175
manual mode. (With
manual mode)
51 ON vehicle
Refer to AT-220, "Can-
not Be Changed to 3. CAN communication line AT-109
Manual Mode".
AT-123,
AT-157
Shift point is high in “D”
52 ON vehicle
position. 3. CAN communication line AT-109
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-153
Others 5. Control valve with TCM AT-233
AT-123,
AT-157
Shift point is low in “D” 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151
53 ON vehicle
position.
AT-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
AT-123,
ON vehicle AT-157
Judder occurs during AT
54
lock-up. 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145 D
E
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-109 F
Strange noise in “R”
55 5. Torque converter AT-283
position.
G
OFF vehicle 7. Gear system AT-267

8. High and low reverse clutch AT-317 H
Others
2. Engine speed signal AT-128 I
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “N”
56 4. Control valve with TCM AT-233
position. J
OFF vehicle 6. Oil pump assembly AT-301
7. Gear system AT-267 K
ON vehicle L
5. Torque converter AT-283 M
Strange noise in “D” 6. Oil pump assembly AT-301
57
position.
N
OFF vehicle 8. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to
AT-283
Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD)", AT-22, "Cross- O
AT-91
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-185
(Without
ON vehicle manual
Vehicle dose not decel- 4. 1st position switch (Without manual mode) or manual mode
mode), AT-
erate by engine brake. switch (With manual mode)
175 (With
58 Refer to AT-218, "Vehi-
manual
cle Does Not Deceler-
mode)
ate by Engine Brake".
ON vehicle 3. A/T position AT-225
Engine brake does not
work operate in “2” po- 4. CAN communication line AT-109
59
sition. (Without manual 5. Control valve with TCM AT-233
mode)
Others
ON vehicle
Engine brake does not 4. 1st position switch AT-185
work operate in “1” po-
sition. (Without manual
mode) 6. Control valve with TCM AT-233
ON vehicle
Engine brake does not 4. Manual mode switch AT-175
61 work M5→M4. (With
manual mode) 5. CAN communication line AT-109
OFF vehicle
AT-92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle
Engine brake does not 4. Manual mode switch AT-175
62 work M4→M3. (With
manual mode) 5. CAN communication line AT-109 AT
OFF vehicle D
ON vehicle
4. Manual mode switch AT-175
63 work M3→M2. (With 5. CAN communication line AT-109 F
Others manual mode)
G
1. Transmission range switch AT-117 H
ON vehicle I
4. Manual mode switch AT-175
work M2→M1.
6. Control valve with TCM AT-233 J
K
AT-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle
65 Maximum speed low. 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-317
AT-283
Others "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".)
AT-283
EC-1036
(for
YD25DDTi
engine),
EC-76 (for
VQ40DE
1. Engine idle speed engine
ON vehicle type 1*) or
66 Extremely large creep.
EC-560
(for
VQ40DE
engine
type 2*)
AT-94
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
With selector lever in 1. Transmission range switch AT-117
“P” position, vehicle ON vehicle
does not enter parking B
condition or, with selec-
tor lever in another po- AT-248
67 sition, parking (2WD
condition is not can-
OFF vehicle 3. Parking pawl components
models) or AT
celled. AT-
Refer to AT-194, "In "P" 283(4WD
Position, Vehicle models)
Moves When Pushed". D
ON vehicle E
Vehicle runs with A/T in AT-248 F
68
“P” position. (2WD
models) or
5. Parking pawl components
OFF vehicle AT-
283(4WD G
models)
1. Transmission range switch AT-117 H
Others 2. A/T fluid leakage —

ON vehicle
I
6. Gear system AT-267 J
Vehicle runs with A/T in
“N” position. 8. Reverse brake AT-283
K
69 Refer to AT-194, "In "N" 9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
Position, Vehicle possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-21,
Moves". "Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 2WD)", AT-23,
OFF vehicle AT-283
"Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD)", AT-22, L
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to M
AT-283
Sectional View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24, N
Engine does not start in PG-5, SC-
1. Ignition switch and starter
“N” or “P” position. 35
O
70 Refer to AT-193, "En- ON vehicle
gine Cannot Be Started
in "P" or "N" Position". 3. Transmission range switch AT-117
P
AT-95
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
PG-5, SC-
1. Ignition switch and starter
Engine starts in posi- 35
71 tions other than “N” or ON vehicle
“P”.
ON vehicle
72 Engine stall. 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145
Others Engine stalls when se- ON vehicle
73 lector lever shifted 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-145
“N”→“D”, “R”.
Engine speed does not 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151
ON vehicle
return to idle.
AT-123,
74 Refer to AT-212, "En- 5. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
AT-157
gine Speed Does Not
Return to Idle". 6. CAN communication line AT-109
OFF vehicle
*: Refer to EC-23.
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value INFOID:0000000005443632
A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
SCIA1658E
TCM INSPECTION TABLE
AT-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Power supply
1 SB Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
B
Power supply
2 R Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
3 L CAN-H — — AT
K-line (CONSULT
4 GR The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT. —
signal)
5 B Ground Always 0V D
— Battery voltage
E
6 Y Power supply
— 0V
F
Selector lever in “R” position 0V
Back-up lamp re-
7 LG
lay Selector lever in other positions Battery voltage
G
8 P CAN-L — —
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions Battery voltage
9 BR Starter relay H
Selector lever in other positions 0V
10 B Ground Always 0V
I
CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000005443633
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
J
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function K

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work support
dications on CONSULT.
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. L
Data monitor Input/Output data in the TCM can be read.
CAN diagnostic support mon-
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. M
itor
DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
ECU part number TCM part number can be read.
N
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE
NOTE:
1. The CONSULT electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole- O
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT display. If the difference is notice-
able, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts
using applicable diagnostic procedures. P
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT and that indicated in Service Manual
may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
- Gear position displayed on CONSULT indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
AT-97
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

VHCL/S SE-A/T Approximately matches the speed-
During driving
VHCL/S SE-MTR ometer reading.
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8

ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8.0/8
Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF
Closely matches the tachometer
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
Approximately matches the engine
TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON)
speed.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F) 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is
ATF TEMP 1 Turn ignition switch ON.
indicated.
TCC SOLENOID Lock-up is active 0.4 - 0.6 A
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-24 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24 0 - 0.05 A
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24 0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24 0 - 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24 0 - 0.05 A
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions ON
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions OFF
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “D” position D
Selector lever in “3” position 3
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “1” position 1
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR D
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-24 ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24 OFF
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
AT-98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Selector lever: + side ON B
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER AT
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-24 ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24 OFF
D
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-24 ON
ATF PRES SW 2
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24 OFF
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24 ON E
ATF PRES SW 3
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24 OFF
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24 ON
ATF PRES SW 5 F
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24 OFF
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24 ON
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24 OFF G
Selector lever in “1” position ON
1 POSITION SW
H
Holding overdrive control switch. ON
OD CONT SW
Releasing overdrive control switch. OFF
GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 I
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE
Display Items List (Type 1) J
X: Applicable, —: Not applicable
TCM self-diag-
Items (CONSULT screen nosis
Malfunction is detected when... Reference page K
terms)
DTC
When TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communica-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AT-109
tion signal for 2 seconds or more. L
If this signal is ON other than in “P” or “N” position, this is
judged to be a malfunction.
STARTER RELAY P0615 AT-112
(And if it is OFF in “P” or “N” position, this too is judged to be M
a malfunction.)
TRANSMISSION CONTROL TCM is malfunctioning P0700 AT-116
• Transmission range switch 1-4 signals input with impossible N
pattern.
T/M RANGE SENSOR A P0705 AT-117
• “P” position is detected from “N” position without any other
position being detected in between.
• TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the
O
sensor.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 AT-121
• TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4GR for input
speed sensor 2. P
• Signal from output speed sensor not input due to cut line or
the like.
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR • Unexpected signal input during running. P0720 AT-123
• After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input
from vehicle speed signal before the vehicle starts moving.
TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from
ENGINE SPEED P0725 AT-128
the ECM.
AT-99
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TCM self-diag-
Items (CONSULT screen nosis
Malfunction is detected when... Reference page
terms)
DTC
1GR INCORRECT RATIO A/T cannot shift to 1GR. P0731 AT-130
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short,
or the like.
• A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
TORQUE CONVERTER • TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value P0744 AT-147
with slip rotation.
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short,
or the like.
PC SOLENOID A P0745 AT-149
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position
TP SENSOR P1705 AT-151
signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
During running, the A/T fluid temperature sensor signal volt-
FLUID TEMP SENSOR P1710 AT-153
age is excessively high or low.
• Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed signal not
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL input due to cut line or the like. P1721 AT-157
• Unexpected signal input during running.
Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pres-
INTERLOCK sure switch states are monitored and comparative judgement P1730 AT-159
made.
Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is monitored
1ST E/BRAKING and if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1GR other P1731 AT-161
than in the M1 position, a malfunction is detected.
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
malfunction, cut line, short, or the like.
INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID P1752 AT-163
monitor value.
FR BRAKE SOLENOID P1757 AT-165
monitor value.
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short,
or the like.
DRCT CLUTCH SOLENOID P1762 AT-167
monitor value.
HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID P1767 AT-169
monitor value.
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional mal-
function, cut line, short, or the like.
• TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to oper-
ate the solenoid valve.
L C BRAKE SOLENOID • Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor P1774 AT-173
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear
ratio is irregular.
A T -1 0 0
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TCM self-diag-
Items (CONSULT screen nosis A
Malfunction is detected when... Reference page
terms)
DTC
When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a
M-MODE SWITCH P1815 AT-175 B
malfunction is detected.
NO DTC IS DETECTED FUR-
THER TESTING MAY BE RE- No NG item has been detected. X —
QUIRED AT
Display Items List (Type 2)
X: Applicable, —: Not applicable
D
DTC*1
Items (CONSULT screen “TRANSMIS- MIL*2, “EN- Reference

Malfunction is detected when...
terms) SION” with GINE” with page E
CONSULT CONSULT or
GST
When TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN commu-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
nication signal for 2 seconds or more.
U1000 U1000 AT-109 F
If this signal is ON other than in “P” or “N” position, this
is judged to be a malfunction.
STARTER RELAY P0615 — AT-112 G
(And if it is OFF in “P” or “N” position, this too is judged
to be a malfunction.)
TRANSMISSION CON-
TCM is malfunctioning P0700 P0700 AT-116
TROL H
• Transmission range switch 1-4 signals input with im-
possible pattern.
• “P” position is detected from “N” position without any
I
other position being detected in between.
• TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
INPUT SPEED SENSOR the sensor.
P0717 P0717 AT-121 J
A • TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4GR for
input speed sensor 2.
• Signal from output speed sensor not input due to cut
line or the like. K
OUTPUT SPEED SEN- • Unexpected signal input during running.
P0720 P0720 AT-123
SOR • After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal
input from vehicle speed signal before the vehicle
starts moving. L
TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal
ENGINE SPEED P0725 — AT-128
from the ECM.
1GR INCORRECT RATIO A/T cannot shift to 1GR. P0731 P0731 AT-130 M
2GR INCORRECT RATIO A/T cannot shift to 2GR. P0732 P0732 AT-133
N
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, O
short, or the like.
• A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is
good. P
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference val-
ue with slip rotation.
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
short, or the like.
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value
with monitor value.
AT-101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC*1
Items (CONSULT screen “TRANSMIS- MIL*2, “EN- Reference

Malfunction is detected when...
terms) SION” with GINE” with page
CONSULT CONSULT or
GST
TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal po-
TP SENSOR P1705 — AT-151
sition signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
During running, the A/T fluid temperature sensor signal
FLUID TEMP SENSOR P1710 P0710 AT-153
voltage is excessively high or low.
• Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sig-
VEHICLE SPEED SIG-
nal not input due to cut line or the like. P1721 — AT-157
NAL
• Unexpected signal input during running.
Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF
INTERLOCK pressure switch states are monitored and comparative P1730 P1730 AT-159
judgement made.
Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is mon-
itored and if a pattern is detected having engine braking
1ST E/BRAKING P1731 — AT-161
1GR other than in the M1 position, a malfunction is de-
tected.
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to func-
INPUT CLUTCH SOLE- tional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like.
P1752 P1752 AT-163
NOID • TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value
with monitor value.
tional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like.
FR BRAKE SOLENOID P1757 P1757 AT-165
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value
with monitor value.
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
DRCT CLUTCH SOLE- short, or the like.
P1762 P1762 AT-167
with monitor value.
HLR CLUTCH SOLE- tional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like.
P1767 P1767 AT-169
with monitor value.
Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
L C BRAKE SOLENOID P1772 P1772 AT-171
• TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to
operate the solenoid valve.
L C BRAKE SOLENOID • Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from P1774 P1774*3 AT-173
monitor value, and relation between gear position and
actual gear ratio is irregular.
When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detect-
M-MODE SWITCH P1815 — AT-175
ed, a malfunction is detected.
NO DTC IS DETECTED
FURTHER TESTING No NG item has been detected. X X —
MAY BE REQUIRED
DATA MONITOR MODE

Display Items List
AT-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Monitor Item Selection A
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS
NALS FROM B
ITEM
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h) X X Output speed sensor
AT
VHCL/S SE-MTR (km/h) X —
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — Accelerator pedal position signal
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X D
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —

Signal input with CAN communications
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X — E
BRAKE SW (ON/OFF) X — Stop lamp switch
Gear position recognized by the TCM updated

GEAR — X
after gear-shifting
F
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X G

OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
GEAR RATIO — X H
Difference between engine speed and torque
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
converter input shaft speed
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — — I
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X — J

ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X —
ATF TEMP 1 (°C) — X Temperature of ATF in the oil pan. K

Temperature of ATF at the exit of torque convert-
ATF TEMP 2 (°C) — X
er.
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — L
ATF PRES SW 1 (ON/OFF) X X
ATF PRES SW 2 (ON/OFF) X X (for LC/B solenoid) M


N
RANGE SW 1 (ON/OFF) X —
O
P
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X — 1st position switch

Selector lever position is recognized by TCM.
SLCT LVR POSI — X For fail-safe operation, the specific value used
for control is displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
AT-103
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitor Item Selection
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X —
Not mounted but displayed.
HOLD SW (ON/OFF) X —
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) — —
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) — —
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) — —
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) — —
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) — —
ACC OD CUT (ON/OFF) — —

ACC SIGNAL (ON/OFF) — —
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) — —
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) — —
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) — —
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — — LC/B solenoid
TCC SOL MON (A) — —
L/P SOL MON (A) — —
I/C SOL MON (A) — —
FR/B SOL MON (A) — —
D/C SOL MON (A) — —
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — —
ONOFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — LC/B solenoid
P POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
R POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
N POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
D POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
4TH POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
AT-104
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
3RD POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
2ND POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —

AT
1ST POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — —

D
POWER M LAMP (ON/OFF) — — Not mounted but displayed.
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — —

E
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
BACK-UP LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — — F

RANGE SW3 MON (ON/OFF) — —
C/V CLB ID1 — — G

C/V CLB ID2 — —
C/V CLB ID3 — — H

UNIT CLB ID1 — —

I
TRGT GR RATIO — —
J
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa) — —
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa) — —

K
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa) — —
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa) — —
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa) — — L
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa) — —
SHIFT PATTERN — — M
DRV CST JUDGE — —
START RLY MON — — N

NEXT GR POSI — —
SHIFT MODE — —
O
MANU GR POSI — —
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X Vehicle speed recognized by TCM.

P
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
Display Items List
AT-105
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC work support item Description Check item

Following items for “1GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
1ST GR FNCTN P0731
or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
2ND GR FNCTN P0732
or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 • High and low reverse clutch
or not)
solenoid valve
• Each clutch
Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Hydraulic control circuit
4TH GR FNCTN P0734
or not)
5TH GR FNCTN P0735
or not)
Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT INFOID:0000000005443634
OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)

Refer to EC-124, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (for VQ40DE engine Type 1) or EC-952,
"Diagnosis Tool Function" (for YD25DDTi engine).
OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)

Refer to EC-68, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (for VQ40DE engine Type 1) or EC-941, "Diagnosis
Description" (for YD25DDTi engine).
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT)
Description
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. As a method for
locating the suspect circuit, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction
location is output and A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC.
Diagnostic Procedure
1.CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF at least twice, then leave it in the OFF position.
3. Wait 10 seconds.
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to AT-193, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On".
2.JUDGEMNT PROCEDURE
Without Manual Mode
2. Keep pressing shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal ON.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal ON.)
7. Wait 3 seconds.
AT-106
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. Move selector lever from “D” to “3” position.
9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.) A
10. Move selector lever from “3” to “2” position.
12. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.)
B
13. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
With Manual Mode
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. AT
2. Keep pressing shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal ON.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal ON.) D
7. Wait 3 seconds.
8. Move selector lever to the manual shift gate side. (Manual mode signal ON.) E
9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.)
10. Move selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode signal OFF.)
12. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.) F
13. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
>> GO TO 3. G
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to "Judgment Self-diagnosis Code". H
If the system does not go into self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-117, AT-183, AT-184.
>> DIAGNOSIS END I

Judgment Self-diagnosis Code
If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit.
J
No. Malfunctioning item No. Malfunctioning item
1. Output speed sensor AT-123 12. Interlock AT-159
2. Direct clutch solenoid AT-167 13. 1st engine braking AT-161
K
3. Torque converter AT-145 14. Starter relay AT-112

4. Line pressure solenoid AT-149 15. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-151 L
5. Input clutch solenoid AT-163 16. Engine speed AT-128
6. Front brake solenoid AT-165 17. CAN communication line AT-109
7. Low coast brake solenoid AT-171, AT-173 18. 1GR incorrect ratio AT-130 M
8. High and low reverse clutch solenoid AT-169 19. 2GR incorrect ratio AT-133
9. Transmission range switch AT-117 20. 3GR incorrect ratio AT-136
N
10. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-153 21. 4GR incorrect ratio AT-139
11. Input speed sensor AT-121 22. 5GR incorrect ratio AT-142
O
AT-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
JPDIA0024GB
Erase Self-diagnosis
• In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
• However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch OFF after executing self-diagnosis or by eras-
ing the memory using the CONSULT.
AT-108
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005443635
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission AT
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005443636
D
Diagnostic trouble code “U1000” with CONSULT or 17th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected when
TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
E
Possible Cause INFOID:0000000005443637
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.) F
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005443638
NOTE: G
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION with CONSULT. I
3. If DTC is detected, go to AT-111, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
J
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT”
WITHOUT CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 6 seconds. K
2. Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT".
3. If the check result is NG, go to AT-111, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
AT-109
Wiring Diagram - AT - CAN INFOID:0000000005443639
MCWA0194E
Terminal Wire color Item Condition Data (Approx.)
3 L CAN-H — —
8 P CAN-L — —
AT-110
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005443640
A
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
B
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
Is “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated?
AT
YES >> Go to LAN section. Refer to LAN-46, "CAN System Specification Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END
AT-111
P0615 STARTER RELAY
P0615 STARTER RELAY
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.

CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000005443642
Item name Condition Display value

STARTER RELAY
Diagnostic trouble code “P0615” with CONSULT or 14th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected when
starter relay is switched ON other than at “P” or “N” position. (Or when switched OFF at “P” or “N” position).
• Harness or connectors
(starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
• Starter relay
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
WITHOUT CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
AT-112
P0615 STARTER RELAY
Wiring Diagram - AT - STSIG INFOID:0000000005443646
AT
P
JMCWA0020GB
9 BR Starter relay
AT-113
P0615 STARTER RELAY
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” ON/OFF.

STARTER RELAY
Without CONSULT
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector and ground.
Voltage (Ap-
Name Connector Terminal Shift position
prox.)
“N” and “P” Battery voltage
Starter relay E17 48 − Ground Other than
0V
the above.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA7211E
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR AND IPDM E/R CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector and
IPDM E/R connector.
Item Connector Terminal Continuity

A/T assembly harness connector F36 9
Yes
IPDM E/R connector E17 48
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
SCIA6254E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minal and TCM connector terminal.

Yes
TCM connector F502 8
OK or NG
SCIA5440E
OK >> GO TO 4.
AT-114
P0615 STARTER RELAY
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A
Check the following.

• Starter relay, Refer to SC-35.
B
• IPDM E/R, Refer to PG-26.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
AT
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK DTC
Perform AT-112, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2. E
AT-115
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. TCM con-
trols A/T.
Diagnostic trouble code “P0700” with CONSULT is detected when TCM is malfunctioning.
TCM
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
WITH GST
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform AT-116, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
Is “P0700” displayed again?
YES >> Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
AT-116
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
A
• The PNP switch includes a transmission range switch. B

• The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to TCM.
AT

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P D
SLCT LVR POSI E
Selector lever in “1” position 1 F
Diagnostic trouble code “P0705” with CONSULT or 9th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under G
the following conditions.
• When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 based
on the gear position. H
• When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” position.
I
(Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 J
CAUTION: K
NOTE:
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. L
WITH CONSULT
M
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
N
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
O
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT P
Accelerator opening : More than 1.0/8

AT-117
Wiring Diagram - AT - TM/SW INFOID:0000000005443658
JMCWA0027GB
1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SW CIRCUIT

With CONSULT
AT-118
3. Check if correct selector lever position (N/P, R, D, 3, 2 or 1) is displayed as selector lever is moved into A
each position.
Item name Condition Display value B

AT
SLCT LVR POSI
Selector lever in “2” position 2 D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. E
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
H
Check A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM". J
2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between transmission range switch connector
(A) terminals and TCM connector (B) terminals. K

Transmission range switch L
F505 1
connector Yes
Transmission range switch M
F505 2
connector Yes
TCM connector F503 11 JSDIA1328GB
Transmission range switch N

F505 3
connector Yes
O
F505 5
connector Yes
P
OK or NG
5.CHECK DTC
AT-119
Perform AT-117, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-120
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
A
Input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of automatic B
transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
AT

INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed. D
Diagnostic trouble code “P0717” with CONSULT or 11th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under E
• When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
• When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4GR for input speed sensor 2. F
• Harness or connectors G
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Input speed sensor 1 and/or 2
H
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. I
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
J
WITH CONSULT K
L
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED : 1,500 rpm or more M
GEAR (Input speed sensor 1) : “4” or “5” position
GEAR (Input speed sensor 2) : All positions N
: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
Driving location
conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT” P
WITHOUT CONSULT
Selector lever position : “D” position

Vehicle speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
AT-121
Engine speed : 1,500 rpm or more
Gear (Input speed sensor 1) : “4” or “5” position
Gear (Input speed sensor 2) : All positions
: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
Driving location
conditions required for this test.
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
3. Start vehicle and read the value of “INPUT SPEED”.

INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-122
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
A
Output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is B
sent to TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
AT

VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. D
Diagnostic trouble code “P0720” with CONSULT or 1st judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under E
• After ignition switch is turned ON, irregular vehicle speed signal input from combination meter before the F
vehicle starts moving.
G
• Output speed sensor H
• Vehicle speed signal (combination meter)
I
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
J
NOTE:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K
WITH CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. L
3. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR”
value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-125, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
N
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8 O
: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions re-
Driving location
quired for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-125, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
If the check result is OK, go to following step.

ENGINE SPEED : 3,500 rpm or more
AT-123
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions re-
Driving location
If DTC is detected, go to AT-125, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT

: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving condi-
Driving location
tions required for this test.
AT-124
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T INFOID:0000000005443671
AT
P
JMCWA0011GB

With CONSULT
AT-125
3. Read the value of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.

VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SUB-HARNESS
2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector and TCM connector.
(A) terminals and TCM connector (B) terminals.

Transmission range switch con-
F505 8
nector Yes
F505 9
nector Yes
TCM connector F503 17 JSDIA1329GB

F505 10
nector Yes
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE THE OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND CHECK DTC
1. Replace output speed sensor. Refer to AT-248, "Output Speed Sensor Component (2WD Models Only)"
(2WD models), AT-283, AT-267, "Component" (4WD models).
OK or NG
NG >> Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
6.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
AT-126
NG >> GO TO 2. A
AT
AT-127
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
The engine speed signal is sent from ECM to TCM.


ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking or running.
(ECM to TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT

WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT

1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
AT-128
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". A
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-109.
NO >> GO TO 2. B
With CONSULT AT
3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change corresponding to wide-open throttle posi-
tion signal. D

E
ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
NG >> Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
• Refer to EC-947, "CONSULT Function" (for YD25DDTi engine), EC-117, "CONSULT Function
(ENGINE)" (for VQ40DE engine type 1*) or EC-600, "CONSULT Function (ENGINE)" (for
G
VQ40DE engine type 2*).
*: Refer to EC-23.
3.CHECK DTC H
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 4.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. K
Check A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. L
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M
AT-129
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
TCM detects any inconsistency in the actual gear ratio.
• Input clutch solenoid valve

• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
1. Start the engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
2. Make sure that “ATF TEMP 1” is within the following range.
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

If out of range, drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
- Without manual mode
SLCT LVR POSI : “1” position

GEAE : “1” position
ACCELE POSI : 0.6/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED : 300 rpm or more
- With manual mode
MANU MODE SW : ON
5. Keep the current driving status for at least 5 consecutive seconds if CONSULT screen changes from
“OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
AT-130
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to “AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMIS- A
SION)"”.
If “COMPLETED RESULT NG” is detected, go to AT-131, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If “STOP VEHICLE” is detected, go to the following step.
B
6. Stop vehicle.
7. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
- Touch “OK” to complete the inspection when normally shifted from the 1GR to 5GR.
- Touch “NG” when an unusual shift shock, etc. occurs in spite of shifting from the 1GR to 5GR. Go to AT- AT
61, "Road Test".
- Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode when not shifted from the 1GR to 5GR. (Neither “OK” nor “NG”
are indicated.) D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITHOUT CONSULT”.
E
WITHOUT CONSULT
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. F
Selector lever position : “1” position G

Gear position : “1” position
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more H
- With manual mode
Selector lever position : “M” position I

Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more J
K
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE L

With CONSULT
M
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT".
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? N
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT O
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEM
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
AT-131
4.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
1. Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
OK or NG
NG >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “Road Test” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to AT-61,
"Road Test".
AT-132
A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005443685 AT
D
• Input clutch solenoid valve E

• Each clutch F
G
CAUTION:
NOTE: H
I
WITH CONSULT
2. Make sure that “ATF TEMP 1” is within the following range. J
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

If out of range, drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. K
3. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CON-
SULT.
- Without manual mode L

GEAE : “2” position M
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more N
- With manual mode
O
MANU MODE SW : ON
ACCELE POSI : 0.6/8 or more P
CAUTION:
AT-133
a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to “AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMIS-
SION)"”.
6. Stop vehicle.
- Touch “NG” when an unusual shift shock, etc. occurs in spite of shifting from the 1GR to 5GR. Go to AT-
61, "Road Test".
are indicated.)
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT
Selector lever position : “2” position

- With manual mode
Selector lever position : “M” position


With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
AT-134
4.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM A
B
OK or NG
AT
"Road Test".
AT-135

• Each clutch
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

3. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CON-
SULT.

- With manual mode
MANU MODE SW : ON
CAUTION:
AT-136
SION)"”.
B
6. Stop vehicle.
61, "Road Test".
are indicated.) D
WITH GST
E
WITHOUT CONSULT
Selector lever position : “3” position G

Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more H
- With manual mode
Selector lever position : “M” position I

Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more J
K
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE L

With CONSULT
M
Without CONSULT
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? N
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT O
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
AT-137
OK or NG
"Road Test".
AT-138
A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005443695 AT
Diagnostic trouble code “P0734” with CONSULT or 21st judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected when
D
• Input clutch solenoid valve E

• Each clutch F
G
CAUTION:
NOTE: H
I
WITH CONSULT
2. Make sure that “ATF TEMP 1” is within the following range. J
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

If out of range, drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. K
3. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
L
O/D OFF indicator lamp : ON
GEAE : “4” position M
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more N
- With manual mode
O
MANU MODE SW : “M” position
P
CAUTION:
AT-139
a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to “AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMIS-
SION)"”.
6. Stop vehicle.
- Touch “NG” when an unusual shift shock, etc. occurs in spite of shifting from the 1GR to 5GR. Go to AT-
61, "Road Test".
are indicated.)
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT

O/D OFF indicator lamp : ON
- With manual mode


With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
AT-140
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A
B
OK or NG
AT
"Road Test".
AT-141
Diagnostic trouble code “P0735” with CONSULT or 22nd judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected when

• Each clutch
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

3. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.

O/D OFF indicator lamp : OFF
ENGINE SPEED : TURBINE REV − 50 rpm or more
TURBINE REV : 300 rpm or more
- With manual mode
MANU MODE SW : “M” position

ENGINE SPEED : TURBINE REV − 50 rpm or more
TURBINE REV : 300 rpm or more
CAUTION:
AT-142
SION)"”.
B
6. Stop vehicle.
61, "Road Test".
are indicated.) D
WITH GST
E
WITHOUT CONSULT
Selector lever position : “D” position G

O/D OFF indicator lamp : OFF
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more H
- With manual mode
I
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more J
5. If the check result is NG, go to AT-143, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L
With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. M
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". N
NO >> GO TO 2. O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
AT-143
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
"Road Test".
AT-144
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
A
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D3, D4, D5, M2, M3, M4 and M5 (for B
YD25DDTi engine) / D5, M2, M3, M4 and M5 [for VQ40DE engine (with manual mode)] / D5 [for VQ40DE
engine (without manual mode)] by the TCM in response to signals sent from the output speed sensor and
accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then
be controlled. AT
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. D
E
F
Diagnostic trouble code “P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT or 3rd judgment flicker without CON-
G
SULT is detected under the following conditions.
• When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
• When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
H
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

• Harness or connectors I
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
J
CAUTION:
NOTE: K
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. L
WITH CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. M

N
ACCELE POSI : 0.5/8 – 1.0/8
: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required
Driving location
for this test.
O
4. If DTC is detected go to AT-146, "Diagnosis Procedure".

WITH GST P
WITHOUT CONSULT
AT-145

Accelerator opening : 0.5/8 – 1.0/8
: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
Driving location
required for this test.

With CONSULT
3. Read the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-146
A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000005443711 AT

D

E
Diagnostic trouble code “P0744” with CONSULT or 3rd judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under
• When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. F
• When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation.
G
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve H
I
CAUTION:
NOTE:
J
K
WITH CONSULT
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 30 seconds. L

ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8 M
TCC SOLENOID : 0.4 – 0.6 A
: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions re- N
Driving location
quired for this test
- For shift schedule, refer to AT-346, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases".
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-148, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
WITH GST
P
WITHOUT CONSULT

AT-147
Driving location
required for this test
- For shift schedule, refer to AT-346, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases".

With CONSULT
3. Read the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-148
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
A
Line pressure solenoid valve regulates oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to B
a signal sent from TCM.
AT

LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A D
Diagnostic trouble code “P0745” with CONSULT or 4th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under E
• When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. F
• Harness or connectors G
• Line pressure solenoid valve
H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and I
WITH CONSULT J
3. If DTC is detected, go to AT-149, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
WITH GST
L
WITHOUT CONSULT
3. If the check result is NG, go to AT-149, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
N
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. O
3. Read the value of “LINE PRES SOL” while driving.
P
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-149

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-150
P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor sends a signal to ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN com- B
munication.
AT

Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 D
ACCELE POSI
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005443724 E
TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
F
G
H
NOTE:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I
WITH CONSULT
1. Start the engine and let it idle for 1 seconds. J
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISISON” with CONSULT.
WITH GST K
WITHOUT CONSULT
1. Start the engine and let it idle for 1 seconds. L
M

N
With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISISON” with CONSULT.
O
Without CONSULT
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? P
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
With CONSULT
AT-151
P1705 TP SENSOR
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read the value of “ACCELE POSI”.

Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT
Function (TRANSMISSION)".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT. Refer to EC-947, "CONSULT Func-
tion" (for YD25DDTi engine), EC-117, "CONSULT Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ40DE engine type 1*) or
EC-600, "CONSULT Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ40DE engine type 2*).
*: Refer to EC-23.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check the DTC detected item.
• Refer to EC-947, "CONSULT Function" (for YD25DDTi engine), EC-117, "CONSULT Function
(ENGINE)" (for VQ40DE engine type 1*) or EC-600, "CONSULT Function (ENGINE)" (for
*: Refer to EC-23.
• If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-109.
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
AT-152
P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A
A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM. B
AT
Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 1 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V
D
TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. E
F
• A/T fluid temperature sensors
G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
NOTE:
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
WITH CONSULT
1. Start the engine J
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to
maintain continuously.) K

L
WITH GST M
WITHOUT CONSULT N
2. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to
maintain continuously.)
O
Accelerator opening : More than 1.0/8 P
AT-153
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS INFOID:0000000005443733
JMCWA0028GB
1.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL

With CONSULT
AT-154
3. Read the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1”. A
Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)

ATF TEMP SE 1 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
AT
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check AT-155, "Component Inspection". D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM". E
3.CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Disconnect transmission range switch connector and TCM connector. F
(A) terminals and TCM connector (B) terminals.
G
F505 6
connector Yes H
F505 7
connector Yes I
TCM connector F503 18 JSDIA1330ZZ

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT K
1. Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179.

2. Reinstall any part removed. L
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M
5.CHECK DTC
OK or NG N
NG >> GO TO 1.
O
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005443735
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR P

AT-155
2. Check resistance between transmission range switch connector
(A) terminals.
Temperature Resistance
Name Connector Terminal
[°C (°F)] (Approx.)
0 (32) 15 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature
F505 6-7 20 (68) 6.5 kΩ
sensor
80 (176) 0.9 kΩ
3. If NG, replace control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control
JSDIA1331ZZ
Valve with TCM".
AT-156
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
A
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication line. The sig- B
nal functions as an auxiliary device to output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. TCM will then use the
vehicle speed signal.

D
VHCL/S SE-MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.

E
Diagnostic trouble code “P1721” with CONSULT is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle
speed signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter.
F
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) G
CAUTION: H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and I
WITH CONSULT J
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. K
ACCELE POSI : 1.0/8 or less

VHCL/S SE-MTR : 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
L
M
With CONSULT N
Without CONSULT O
Is malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the result?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-109. P
NO >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-MTR”.
AT-157

VHCL/S SE-MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter. Refer to DI-4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
AT-158
P1730 INTERLOCK
P1730 INTERLOCK
A
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. B

• Diagnostic trouble code “P1730” with CONSULT or 12th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected AT
when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and switch.
• TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each ATF pressure switch when gear is steady.
Possible Cause INFOID:0000000005443744 D
(The solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.) E
• Low coast brake solenoid valve
• ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005443745 F
CAUTION:
NOTE: G
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. I
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position J

WITH GST
K
WITHOUT CONSULT
1. Start the engine. L
2. Drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 2 consecutive seconds.

M
Judgment of A/T Interlock INFOID:0000000005443746 N
• When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2GR, and should be set in
a condition in which it can travel. O
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is
not a input speed sensor malfunction.
• When interlock is detected at the 3GR or more, it is locked at the 2GR. P
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

With CONSULT
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
AT-159
P1730 INTERLOCK
Without CONSULT
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to AT-171 (DTC P1772), AT-173
(DTC P1774).
2.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
AT-160
P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
A
• Without manual mode B

Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by 1st engine brake other than at “1” position.
• With manual mode
Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by 1st engine brake other than at “M1” position.
- AT
D
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-24. ON
ON OFF SOL E
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24. OFF
ATF PRES SW 2
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24. OFF F
Diagnostic trouble code “P1731” with CONSULT or 13th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under G
• When TCM monitors each ATF pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when H
engine brake of 1GR acts other than at “1” position. (Without manual mode)
• When TCM monitors each ATF pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when
engine brake of 1GR acts other than at “M1” position. (With manual mode)
I
• Harness or connectors J
K
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. L
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously preformed, always turn ignition switch OFF and M
WITH CONSULT N
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds. O

P
GEAR : “1” position
- With manual mode
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : “1” position
AT-161
WITHOUT CONSULT
Selector lever position : “1” position

- With manual mode

1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT
3. Drive vehicle in the “1” position (1st gear) (Without manual mode) or “M” position (1st gear) (With manual
mode), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”.

ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-162
P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID
A
Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by TCM in response to signals sent from transmission range switch, B
output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.

D
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
E
Diagnostic trouble code “P1752” with CONSULT or 5th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under
the following conditions. F
G
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) H
I
CAUTION:
NOTE: J
K
WITH CONSULT

GEAR : “3” ⇒ “4” (I/C ON/OFF)
M
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions re-
Driving location N
WITH GST O
WITHOUT CONSULT
1. Start the engine. P

Gear position : “3” ⇒ “4” (I/C ON/OFF)
AT-163
Driving location
required for this test.

With CONSULT
3. Read the value of “I/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-164
P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID
A
Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by TCM in response to signals sent from transmission range switch, B

D
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
E
G
I
CAUTION:
NOTE: J
K
WITH CONSULT

GEAR : “3” ⇒ “4” (FR/B ON/OFF)
M
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
Driving location N
for this test.
WITH GST O
WITHOUT CONSULT

Gear position : “3” ⇒ “4” (FR/B ON/OFF)
AT-165
Driving location
for this test.

With CONSULT
3. Read the value of “FR/B SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-166
P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID
A
Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by TCM in response to signals sent from transmission range switch, B

D
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
E
Diagnostic trouble code “P1762” with CONSULT or 2nd judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under
G
I
CAUTION:
NOTE: J
K
WITH CONSULT

GEAR : “1” ⇒ “2” (D/C ON/OFF)
M
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
Driving location N
for this test.
WITH GST O
WITHOUT CONSULT

Gear position : “1” ⇒ “2” (D/C ON/OFF)
AT-167
Driving location
for this test.

With CONSULT
3. Read the value of “D/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-168
P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID
A
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by TCM in response to signals sent from transmission B
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will
then be shifted to the optimum position.

D
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
E
G
I
CAUTION:
NOTE: J
K
WITH CONSULT

GEAR : “2” ⇒ “3” (HLR/C ON/OFF)
M
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
Driving location N
for this test.
WITH GST O
WITHOUT CONSULT

Gear position : “2” ⇒ “3” (HLR/C ON/OFF)
AT-169
Driving location
for this test.

With CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISISON” with CONSULT.
3. Read the value of “HLR/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-24. 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-24. 0 - 0.05 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-170
P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
A
Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by TCM in response to signals sent from transmission B
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will

D
ON OFF SOL
E
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
G
H
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. I
NOTE:
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
WITH CONSULT
1. Start the engine. K
- Without manual mode L
SLCT LVR POSI : “1” or “2” position
GEAR : “1” or “2” (LC/B ON/OFF)
M
- With manual mode
MANU MODE SW : ON
N
WITH GST O
WITHOUT CONSULT P
Selector lever position : “1” or “2” position

Gear position : “1” or “2” (LC/B ON/OFF)
- With manual mode
AT-171


With CONSULT
3. Read the value of “ON OFF SOL” while driving.

ON OFF SOL
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-172
A
• Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by TCM in response to signals sent from transmission B
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunc-
tion such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
D
ON OFF SOL E
ATF PRES SW 2
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-24. OFF F
G
• When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) H
• When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
I
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) J
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005443788 K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. L
NOTE:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. M
WITH CONSULT
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. N
SLCT LVR POSI : “1” or “2” position O

-
P
MANU MODE SW : ON
3. Perform step 2 again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step 1 to 3 again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
If DTC (P1774) is detected, go to AT-174, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AT-173
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
Selector lever position : “1” or “2” position

-

3. Perform step 2 again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF position, then perform step 1 to 3 again.

With CONSULT
3. Drive vehicle in the “1” / “2” position (11 or 22 gear) (Without manual mode) or “M” position (1GR or 2GR)
(With manual mode), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”.

ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
AT-174
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
A
Manual mode switch is installed in A/T shift selector. It sends manual mode switch, shift-up and shift-down B
switch signals to TCM.
TCM sends the switch signals to combination meter. by CAN communication line. Then manual mode switch
position is indicated on A/T position indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-189.
AT
D
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF E
NON M-MODE SW
Selector lever: + side ON F
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER G

H
Diagnostic trouble code “P1815” with CONSULT is detected when TCM monitors Manual mode, Non manual
mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs 1 second or
more. I
• Harness or connectors. J
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
• Manual mode select switch. (Into A/T shift selector)
• Manual mode position select switch. (Into A/T shift selector) K
CAUTION: L
NOTE:
M
WITH CONSULT N
O
MANU MODE SW : ON
P
AT-175
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram - AT - MMSW INFOID:0000000006081256
JMCWA0013GB
Wire col-
or
3 L CAN-H — —
8 P CAN-L — —
AT-176
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
A
With CONSULT
B
Without CONSULT AT
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-109. D
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT E
3. Read the ON/OFF switching action of “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER” and F
“DOWN SW LEVER”.
Item name Condition Display Value G

MANU MODE SW
H
NON M-MODE SW
selector lever: +side ON I
UP SW LEVER
selector lever: -side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF J
Without CONSULT
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the K
position mutually coincide when selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. L
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM M
• Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-178, "Component Inspection".
• Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
• Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T shift selector (manual mode N
switch).
• Combination meter. Refer to DI-4.
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DTC P

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.
AT-177
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Check A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector
OK or NG
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006081258
MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector (A) terminals.
Item Position Terminal Continuity

Auto 9 – 10
Manual mode select switch
Manual 6–9
Yes
UP 8–9
Manual mode position select switch
DOWN 7–9
JSDIA1485GB
AT-178
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN INFOID:0000000005443790
AT
JMCWA0021GB
AT-179
Power supply
1 SB Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
Power supply
2 R Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
— Battery voltage
6 Y Power supply
— 0V
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1

2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground.
Voltage (Ap-
Item Connector Terminal
prox.)
1 - Ground
Battery voltage
TCM F36 2 - Ground
6 - Ground 0V
OK or NG
SCIA2104E
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground.
Voltage (Ap-
Item Connector Terminal
prox.)
1 - Ground
TCM F36 2 - Ground Battery voltage
6 - Ground
OK or NG
SCIA2105E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
• Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly harness connector F36 terminals 1, 2
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T assembly harness connector F36 terminal 6
• 10 A fuse (No. 25, located in fuse and fusible link block) and 10 A fuse (No. 49, located in IPDM E/R)
• Ignition switch, Refer to PG-5.
OK or NG
AT-180
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
B
minals and ground.
AT
TCM F36 5, 10 - Ground Yes
D
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. SCIA2106E
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F

Check A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS H
With CONSULT
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
OK or NG I
NG - 1 >> Self-diagnosis does not activate: GO TO 7.
NG - 2 >> DTC is displayed: Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function J
(TRANSMISSION)".
7.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM". K
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
minals and TCM connector terminals. L

A/T assembly harness connector F36 1 M
Yes
Yes N
A/T assembly harness connector F36 6 SCIA5464E
Yes
TCM connector F502 4 O
AT-181
minals and TCM connector terminals.

Yes
Yes
5. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. SCIA5465E
OK or NG
AT-182
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIR-
CUIT
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION
A
CIRCUIT
B

Released accelerator pedal. ON AT
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS D
Released accelerator pedal. OFF

E
With CONSULT F
Without CONSULT G
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-109. H
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
I
With CONSULT
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read the value of “CLSD THL POS” and “W/O THL POS”. J
Item name
Accelerator pedal operation K
CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS
Released ON OFF
Fully depressed OFF ON L
OK or NG
NG >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts. M
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT. Refer to EC-947, "CON-
SULT Function" (for YD25DDTi engine), EC-117, "CONSULT Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ40DE
engine type 1*), EC-600, "CONSULT Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ40DE engine type 2*).
N
*: Refer to EC-23.
• Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
• Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
O
AT-183
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

BRAKE SW

With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
3. Read the ON/OFF switching action of “BRAKE SW”.

BRAKE SW
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector E109
terminals 1 and 2. Refer to AT-190, "Wiring Diagram - AT - NON-
DTC".
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed Yes
When brake pedal is released No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-5.
SCIA2144E
OK or NG
OK >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch.
• Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch and combination meter.
• 10 A fuse (No. 20, located in fuse block).
NG >> Repair or replace stop lamp switch.
AT-184
1ST POSITION SWITCH
1ST POSITION SWITCH
A
B
Selector lever in “1” position. ON
1 POSITION SW
Selector lever in other positions. OFF AT
D
With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. E
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". F
Is any malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
NO >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT H
3. Read out “1 POSITION SW”.
Check the signal of the 1st position switch is indicated properly. I

Selector lever in “1” position. ON J
1 POSITION SW
Selector lever in other positions. OFF
K
Without CONSULT
2. Check voltage between A/T shift selector connector terminal and ground. Refer to AT-190, "Wiring Dia-
gram - AT - NONDTC". L
Item Connector Terminal Condition Data (Approx.)

M
Selector lever in “1” position. 0V
A/T device M79 9 - Ground
Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH O
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector M79 terminals 9 and 10. P
Selector lever in “1” position. Yes
Selector lever in other positions. No
OK or NG
AT-185
1ST POSITION SWITCH
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace 1st position switch.
Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between combination meter connector M23 terminal 18 and A/T shift selector con-
nector M79 terminal 9.
• Harness for short or open between A/T shift selector connector M79 terminal 10 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-16, "Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-186
OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH
A
B
Holding overdrive control switch ON
OD CONT SW
Releasing overdrive control switch OFF AT
D
With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. E
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". F
Is any malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
NO >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTOROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT H
3. Read out “OD CONT SW”.
Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly. I

Holding overdrive control switch ON J
OD CONT SW
Releasing overdrive control switch OFF
K
Without CONSULT
2. Check voltage between A/T shift selector connector terminal and ground. Refer to AT-190, "Wiring Dia-
L
gram - AT - NONDTC".
Item Connector Terminal Condition Data (Approx.)

M
A/T shift selec- Releasing overdrive control switch Battery voltage
M79 7 - Ground
tor Holding overdrive control switch 0V
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH O

3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector M79 terminals 7 and 8. P
Holding overdrive control switch Yes
Releasing overdrive control switch No
OK or NG
AT-187
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace overdrive control switch.
Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between combination meter connector M23 terminal 20 and A/T shift selector con-
nector M79 terminal 7.
• Harness for short or open between A/T shift selector connector M79 terminal 8 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-16, "Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
AT-188
A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT
A
TCM sends the switch signals to combination meters. by CAN communication line. Then selector lever posi- B
tion is indicated on the A/T indicator.
AT

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P D
E
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “1” position 1 F
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR D
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3 G
H
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS I
With CONSULT
J
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) and the indication of the A/T indicator mutu-
ally coincide. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
4. Check the following. K
- With manual mode
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the
position mutually coincide when selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1GR ⇔ 5GR). L
Check the actual selector lever position (“3”, “2” and “1”) and the indication of the A/T indicator mutually coin-
cide. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
OK or NG M
NG >> Check the following.
N
A/T INDICATOR SYMPTOM CHART
Items Possible location of malfunction

O
• The actual gear position does not change. Manual mode switch (With manual mode)
• Shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in • Refer to AT-175.
the manual mode possible). (With manual mode) A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated)
• The A/T indicator is not indicated. • Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)". P
The actual gear position changes, but the A/T indicator is not indi- Perform the self-diagnosis function.
cated. • Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
The actual gear position and the indication on the A/T indicator do Perform the self-diagnosis function.
not coincide. • Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the A/T Check combination meter.
indicator. • Refer to DI-4.
AT-189
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC INFOID:0000000005443800
JMCWA0074GB
AT-190
AT
JMCWA0023GB
AT-191
JMCWA0026GB
Wire
color
3 L CAN-H — —
K-line (CONSULT
4 GR The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT. —
signal)
AT-192
Wire
color A
Selector lever in “R” position 0V
Back-up lamp re-
7 LG
lay Selector lever in other positions Battery voltage B
8 P CAN-L — —
9 BR Starter relay AT
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On INFOID:0000000005443801

D
SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch ON. E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE F
With CONSULT
G
Without CONSULT
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? H
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT I
Check combination meter. Refer to DI-4.
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 3
3.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position INFOID:0000000005443802
M
SYMPTOM:
• Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
N
• Engine can be started with selector lever in “R”, “D” position. (With manual mode)
• Engine can be started with selector lever in “R”, “D”, “3”, “2” or “1” position. (Without manual mode)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE O
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. P
Without CONSULT
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate transmission range switch?
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117.
NO >> GO TO 2.
AT-193
2.CHECK A/T POSITION

Check A/T position. Refer to AT-225, "Checking of A/T Position".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust A/T position. Refer to AT-225, "Adjustment of A/T Position".
3.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Check starting system. Refer to SC-35.
OK or NG
In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed INFOID:0000000005443803
SYMPTOM:
Even though selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated, allowing
the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components. Refer to AT-240, "Parking Component (2WD Models Only)" (2WD models), AT-
283 (4WD models).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
NG >> Check malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-
69, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No. 58)
In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves INFOID:0000000005443804
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate transmission range switch?
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117.
NO >> GO TO 2.
AT-194
2.CHECK A/T POSITION A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. B
3.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE
AT
Check A/T fluid leakage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
NG >> Repair damaged parts to refill ATF.
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM". E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
NG >> Check malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-
69, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No. 69).
5.CHECK SYMPTOM G
Check again. Refer to AT-61, "Road Test".
OK or NG H
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TCM I
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-96, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector. J
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K
Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position) INFOID:0000000005443805
L
SYMPTOM:
A noticeable shock occurs when selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE M
With CONSULT
N
Without CONSULT
O
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", AT-106, P
"Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE IDLE SPEED
Check engine idle speed. Refer to EC-1036, "Work Procedure" (for YD25DDTi engine), EC-80, "Idle Speed
and Ignition Timing Check" (for VQ40DE engine type 1*), EC-564, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for
*: Refer to EC-23.
AT-195
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust engine idle speed.
• Refer to EC-1036, "Work Procedure" (for YD25DDTi engine), EC-76, "Basic Inspection" (for
VQ40DE engine type 1*), EC-560, "Basic Inspection" (for VQ40DE engine type 2*).
*: Refer to EC-23.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7.
1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283.
3. Check the following.
- Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-301, "Oil Pump".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
- Power train system. Refer to AT-283.
- Transmission case. Refer to AT-283.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
Check malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-69, "Symp-
tom Chart" (Symptom No. 1).
OK or NG
AT-196
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK SYMPTOM
B
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
AT
11.CHECK TCM
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness D
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END E
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position INFOID:0000000005443806
F
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
G
H
With CONSULT
I
Without CONSULT
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results? J
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", AT-106,
"Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT"
NO >> GO TO 2.
K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE M

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STALL TEST O
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” and “R” positions. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis".
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK in “D” position, NG in “R” position>>GO TO 5.
NG in both “1” and “R” positions>>GO TO 8.
2. Check the following items:
AT-197
- Reverse brake. Refer to AT-283.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
Check line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 7.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG
AT-198
B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
AT
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" Position INFOID:0000000005443807
D
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE E

With CONSULT F
Without CONSULT G
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", AT-106, H
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T POSITION I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE K
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STALL TEST M
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagno-
sis".
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 7.
5.CHECK LINE PRESSURE O
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis".
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 8.
AT-199
3. Check the following items:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG
tom Chart" (Symptom No.43).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1 INFOID:0000000005443808
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on “Cruise Test - Part 1” and “Cruise Test - Part 2”.
AT-200
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM A

Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. B
NG >> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position".
AT
With CONSULT
D
Without CONSULT
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results? E
NO >> GO TO 3.
F
3.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Check accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to AT-151.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor.
4.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE H

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK LINE PRESSURE J
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 8.
L
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283. M
OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 8.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM O
3. Check the following. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
AT-201

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2 INFOID:0000000005443809
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-199, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" Position", AT-200, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started from D1".
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
AT-202
"Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". A
NO >> GO TO 3.
B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
AT
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-58, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. E
F
- Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-301, "Oil Pump". G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM". I
- Power train system. Refer to AT-283. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. K
7.CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 9.
P
9.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK TCM
AT-203
connector.
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
SYMPTOM:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Started from D1".
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
AT-204
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. A
B
- Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-301, "Oil Pump". AT
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
G
tom Chart" (Symptom No. 11). H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
9.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-61, "Road Test". J
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10. K
10.CHECK TCM
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness L
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 9.
A/T Does Not Shift: D3→ D4 INFOID:0000000005443811 P
SYMPTOM:
AT-205
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Started from D1".
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
AT-206
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK SYMPTOM AT
OK or NG
D
NG >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK TCM E
connector. F
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G
tom Chart" (Symptom No. 12). H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
J
SYMPTOM:
• The vehicle does not shift-up from D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
• The vehicle does not shift-up from D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
K
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. M
Started from D1".
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS N
With CONSULT
O
Without CONSULT
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results? P
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-187.
AT-207
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
AT-208
11.CHECK TCM A
connector.
B
OK or NG
AT
tom Chart" (Symptom No. 13). D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E
A/T Does Not Lock-up INFOID:0000000005443813
F
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not lock-up at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE G
With CONSULT H
Without CONSULT I
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", AT-106, J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE K
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK LINE PRESSURE M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. N
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM O
3. Check the following. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
AT-209
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition INFOID:0000000005443814
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
AT-210
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", AT-106, A
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE B
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION D
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 6.
J
6.CHECK TCM
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness K
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
Check malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-69, "Symp- M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. N
Lock-up Is Not Released INFOID:0000000005443815
O
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing accelerator pedal.
P
With CONSULT
• Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
AT-211
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG
Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle INFOID:0000000005443816
SYMPTOM:
When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
AT-212
5.CHECK SYMPTOM A

OK or NG B
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TCM AT
connector. D
OK or NG
Check malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-69, "Symp- F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
A/T Does Not Shift: 5GR → 4GR INFOID:0000000005443817
H
SYMPTOM:
• When shifted from D5 to D4 position, does not downshift from 5GR to 4GR. (Without manual mode)
• When shifted from M5 to M4 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5GR to 4GR. (With I
manual mode)
J
With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. K
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". L
"Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". M
NO-1 (Without manual mode)>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 (With manual mode)>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT MANUAL MODE) N
Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-187.
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
AT-213
OK or NG
OK-1 (Without manual mode)>>GO TO 6.
OK-2 (With manual mode)>>GO TO 5.
5.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH (WITH MANUAL MODE)
Check manual mode switch. Refer to AT-175.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10.
tom Chart" [Symptom No. 14 (Without manual mode) or symptom No. 47 (With manual mode)].
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SYMPTOM:
• When shifted from D4 to 33 position, does not downshift from 4GR to 3GR. (Without manual mode)
• When shifted from M4 to M3 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4GR to 3GR. (With
manual mode)
With CONSULT
AT-214
Without CONSULT A
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", AT-106, B
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. D
3.CHECK A/T POSITION E
OK or NG
OK-1 (Without manual mode)>>GO TO 5. F
4.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH (WITH MANUAL MODE) G
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
M
7.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG N
NG >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM O
P
connector.
OK or NG
AT-215
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
SYMPTOM:
• When shifted from 33 to 22 position, does not downshift from 3GR to 2GR. (Without manual mode)
• When shifted from M3 to M2 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3GR to 2GR. (With
manual mode)
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
AT-216
7.CHECK SYMPTOM A

OK or NG B
NG >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM AT
connector. D
OK or NG
Check malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-69, "Symp- F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
H
SYMPTOM:
• When shifted from 22 to 11 position, does not downshift from 2GR to 1GR. (Without manual mode)
• When shifted from M2 to M1 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2GR to 1GR. (With I
manual mode)
J
With CONSULT
• Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. K
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". L
"Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". M
2.CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT MANUAL MODE) N
Check 1st position switch circuit. Refer to AT-185.
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
AT-217
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake INFOID:0000000005443821
SYMPTOM:
• No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 22 to 11 gear. (Without manual mode)
• No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2GR to 1GR. (With manual mode)
With CONSULT
AT-218
Without CONSULT
• Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". A
"Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT". B
2.CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT MANUAL MODE) AT
Check 1st position switch circuit. Refer to AT-185.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/T FLUID LEAKAGE E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
4.CHECK A/T POSITION G
OK or NG
OK-1 (Without manual mode)>>GO TO 6. H
5.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH (WITH MANUAL MODE) I
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM M
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
O
8.CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG P
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK TCM
connector.
AT-219
OK or NG
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode INFOID:0000000006135049
SYMPTOM:
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check manual mode switch. Refer to AT-177, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", AT-106, "Diagnosis Proce-
dure without CONSULT".
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-97, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
AT-220
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
A
A/T Shift Selector Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005443822
COMPONENTS B
Without Manual Mode
AT
SCIA7212E K
1. Selector button 2. Selector spring 3. Overdrive control switch

4. Lock pin 5. Selector lever knob 6. Position indicator plate L
7. A/T shift selector assembly 8. A/T device harness connector 9. Shift lock solenoid and park posi-
tion switch assembly
10. Position lamp
M
Refer to GI section to make sure icons (symbol marks) in the figure. Refer to GI-9, "Component".
AT-221
With Manual Mode
SCIA6979E
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover

4. A/T shift selector harness connector 5. Lock plate 6. Control cable
7. Key interlock cable 8. Shift lock solenoid and park position 9. A/T shift selector assembly
switch assembly
10. Slide plate 11. Position lamp 12. Position indicator plate
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Make sure that parking brake is applied before removal/installation.
1. Remove knob cover (2) below selector lever knob (1) downward.
• Without manual mode
SCIA7296E
AT-222
A
AT
JSDIA1739ZZ
D
2. Pull lock pin (3) out of selector lever knob (1).
3. Remove selector lever knob (1) and knob cover (2).
4. Remove center console. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation". E
5. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector (1).

6. Disconnect key interlock cable (4) from A/T shift selector assem- F
bly. Refer to AT-231, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove lock plate (2) from control cable (3).
8. Disconnect control cable (3) from A/T shift selector assembly. G
SCIA7297E
I
9. Remove A/T shift selector assembly.
: Bolt (4)
J
L
SCIA7298E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. M
CAUTION:
When installing selector lever knob, shift the selector lever to the “N” position.
After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Refer to AT-225, "Adjustment of A/T Position"
and AT-225, "Checking of A/T Position". N
Control Cable Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005443823
O
COMPONENTS
AT-223
SCIA7295E
1. A/T shift selector assembly 2. A/T assembly 3. Manual lever

4. Lock plate 5. Bracket 6. Floor panel
7. Control cable 8. Lock plate
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect control cable from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to AT-221, "A/T Shift Selector Removal
and Installation".
2. Remove control cable from manual lever.
3. Remove lock plate from control cable.
4. Remove control cable from bracket.
5. Remove bracket from A/T assembly.
6. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
SCIA6784E
7. Remove control cable from floor panel.
SCIA6785E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Refer to AT-225, "Adjustment of A/T Position"
and AT-225, "Checking of A/T Position".
AT-224
Adjustment of A/T Position INFOID:0000000005443824
A
1. Loosen nut of control cable.
2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position.
3. Push control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 N (1 B
kg, 2.2 lb), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten nut to
the specified torque. Refer to AT-223, "Control Cable Removal
and Installation". AT
D
SCIA6789E
Checking of A/T Position INFOID:0000000005443825

E
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also check F
selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Check selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the G
positions. Check whether or not the actual position selector lever is in matches the position shown by the
shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the selector lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the fig- H
ure.
• Without manual mode
I
SCIA7316E
L
O
SCIA3906E
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position without applying forward/backward force to P
selector lever, check button operation for sticking.
7. Check back-up lamps illuminate only when selector lever is placed in the “R” position. Check back-up
lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or “N” position.
8. Check engine can only be started with selector lever in the “P” and “N” positions.
9. Check A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, check manual mode is displayed on combination meter.
AT-225
Shift selector lever to “+” and “-” sides, and check set shift position changes (Only while a vehicle is oper-
ating). (With manual mode)
AT-226
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
• The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: B

With the ignition switch turned to ON, selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position
unless brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless selector lever is placed in “P” position. AT
• The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid
and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively.
D
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location INFOID:0000000005443827
JSDIA1629GB
AT-227
Wiring Diagram - A/T - SHIFT INFOID:0000000005443828
JMCWA0018GB
SYMPTOM 1:
• Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied.
• Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
AT-228
• Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2: A
• Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position.
• Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P” position.
1.CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE B
Check key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace key interlock cable. Refer to AT-231, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION D
Check selector lever position for damage. Refer to AT-225, "Checking of A/T Position"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-225, "Adjustment of A/T Position".
3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH
F
1. Connect A/T shift selector harness connector.
3. Selector lever is set in “P” position.
4. Check operation. G
Condition Brake pedal Operation

H
When ignition switch is turned to ON and selector lever is Depressed Yes
set in “P” position. Released No
OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK POWER SOURCE J
2. Check voltage between A/T shift selector harness connector
M79 terminal 1 and ground. K
Condition Brake pedal Data (Approx.)

L
When ignition switch is turned to Depressed Battery voltage
ON. Released 0V
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5.
JSDIA1630ZZ
N
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. O
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector
E109 terminals 3 and 4.
P
When brake pedal is depressed Yes
When brake pedal is released No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-5.
OK or NG
SCIA2126E
AT-229
OK >> GO TO 6.
Check following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch harness connector E109 terminal 3.
• Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector E109 terminal 4 and A/T shift selec-
tor harness connector M79 terminal 1.
• 10 A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)].
• Ignition switch.
OK or NG
7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector
M79 terminal 2 and ground.
Continuity should exist.

OK or NG
OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid and park position switch
assembly.
NG >> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors.
JSDIA1631ZZ
AT-230
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005443830
COMPONENTS B
AT
SCIA6791E
CAUTION: J
• Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interfer-
ence with adjacent parts.
• After installing key interlock cable to A/T shift selector, make sure that casing cap and bracket are K
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39
N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.
REMOVAL L
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove lower instrument panel RH and cluster lid A. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
3. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster M
holder.
4. Remove casing cap from bracket of A/T shift selector assembly
and remove interlock rod from adjuster holder. N
P
SCIA6793E
AT-231
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
5. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock
cable.
SCIA6900E
INSTALLATION
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder.
2. Turn ignition key to lock position.
3. Set selector lever to “P” position.
SCIA6900E
4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.

5. Install casing cap to bracket.
6. Move slider in order to secure adjuster holder to interlock rod.
CAUTION:
Do not touch any other areas than slider or apply any force
to slider except in the sliding direction.
7. Install lower instrument panel RH and cluster lid A. Refer to IP-
11, "Removal and Installation".
8. Install center console. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installa-
tion". SCIA1232E
AT-232
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
A
Control Valve with TCM INFOID:0000000005443831
COMPONENTS B
AT
JSDIA1578GB
M
1. A/T 2. Snap ring 3. Sub-harness
4. Control valve with TCM 5. Bracket 6. O-ring
7. Plug 8. Oil pan gasket 9. Clip (For YD25DDTi engine) N
10. Oil pan mounting bolt 11. Overflow plug 12. Oil pan
13. Magnet 14. Drain plug 15. Drain plug gasket
16. Terminal cord assembly 17. O-ring O
A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to “Installation”.
P
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Drain ATF through drain hole.
3. Remove control cable from A/T assembly. Refer to AT-223, "Control Cable Removal and Installation".
AT-233
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
5. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5021E
6. Push A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5022E
7. Remove clips (1) (for YD25DDTi engine), oil pan (2) and oil pan
gasket.
• : Vehicle front
• : Bolt (22)
• Drain plug (3)
JSDIA1579ZZ
8. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of

malfunction. If the ATF is very dark, smell burned or contains
foreign particles, friction material (clutches, band) may need
replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates var-
nish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to
stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
• If friction material is detected, replace radiator after repair
of A/T. Refer to CO-41, "Component" (for YD25DDTi
engine), CO-13, "Component" (for VQ40DE engine).
SCIA5199E
9. Remove magnets from oil pan.
SCIA5200E
AT-234
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
10. Straighten terminal clip ( ) to free the output speed sensor har-
ness. A
11. Disconnect output speed sensor connector (1).
CAUTION:
Do not damage connector. B
AT
JSDIA1316ZZ
D
12. Remove bolts (A), (B) and (C) from control valve with TCM.
• : Vehicle front
E
Bolt symbol Length [mm (in)] Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
F
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
G
SCIA8074E
13. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. H

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
I
SCIA5142E K
14. Remove plug (1) with bracket (2) from control valve with TCM.
L
: Bolt
JSDIA1311ZZ
15. Remove bracket (1) from plug (2). O
JSDIA1312ZZ
AT-235
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
16. Remove O-ring (1) from plug (2).
JSDIA1313ZZ
17. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5155E
18. Disconnect TCM connectors.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors.
SCIA5447E
19. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve

with TCM using flat-blade screwdriver.
SCIA5448E
20. Disconnect TCM connector (1) and transmission range switch

connector (2).
CAUTION:
Do not damage connectors.
JSDIA1317ZZ
AT-236
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Installation
CAUTION: A
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/T fluid leakage. Refer to AT-225, "Checking
of A/T Position".
1. Connect TCM connector (1) and transmission range switch con- B
nector (2).
AT
JSDIA1317ZZ E
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with

TCM.
F
SCIA5450E
3. Connect TCM connectors. I
L
SCIA5447E
4. Install O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.

M
SCIA5155E
AT-237
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
5. Install new O-ring (1) in plug (2).
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
• O-ring should be free of contamination.
JSDIA1313ZZ
6. Install plug (2) to bracket (1).
JSDIA1312ZZ
7. Install plug (1) [with bracket (2)] to control valve with TCM.
Tighten plug bolt ( ) to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with
TCM.
JSDIA1311ZZ
8. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
1 : Brake band
CAUTION:
• Make sure that input speed sensor is securely installed
into input speed sensor hole (A).
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outside
so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
• Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
JSDIA1318ZZ
• Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection.
SCIA5142E
AT-238
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
9. Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) in control valve with TCM.
A
: Front
B
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6 AT
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA8074E
D
10. Tighten bolt (1), (2) and (3) temporarily to prevent dislocation.
After that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3). Then tighten other
bolts. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified
E
torque.
: Front
F
Bolt symbol A B C
Number of bolts 5 6 1 G
SCIA8075E
Length mm (in) 42 (1.65) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57)
Tightening torque With ATF applied

7.9 (0.81, 70) H
N·m (km-g, in-lb) 7.9 (0.81, 70)
11. Securely fasten output speed sensor (1) harness with terminal
clip ( ). I
12. Connect output speed sensor connector.
JSDIA1316ZZ
L
13. Install magnets onto oil pan.
O
SCIA5200E
14. Install oil pan to transmission case.

a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan. P
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse oil pan gasket.
• Install it in the direction to align hole positions.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
AT-239
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
b. Install oil pan (2) (with oil pan gasket) and clips (1) (for
YD25DDTi engine) to transmission case.
• : Vehicle front
• : Bolt (22)
CAUTION:
• Install it so that drain plug (3) comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
• Be careful not to pinch harnesses.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan mounting surface.
JSDIA1579ZZ
c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-

cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
Tighten necessary oil pan mounting bolts with specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
15. Install drain plug gasket and drain plug to oil pan, and then
tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPO-
NENTS".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket. SCIA4113E
16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
SCIA5038E
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.

18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector.
19. Install control cable to A/T assembly. Refer to AT-223, "Control
Cable Removal and Installation".
20. Pour ATF into A/T assembly. Refer to AT-18, "Changing A/T
Fluid".
21. Connect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
SCIA5039E
Parking Component (2WD Models Only) INFOID:0000000005443832
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Components
AT-240
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
AT
I
SCIA7030E
1. Rear oil seal 2. Rear extension 3. Parking actuator support

J
4. Return spring 5. Parking pawl 6. Pawl shaft
7. Self-sealing bolt 8. Seal ring 9. Parking gear
10. Output shaft 11. Bearing race 12. Needle bearing
K
However, refer to the following symbols for others.
*
: Apply Anaerobic Liquid Gasket (Loctite 518) or equivalent.
L
Removal
M
2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove control cable from A/T assembly. Refer to AT-223, "Control Cable Removal and Installation".
4. Support A/T assembly using a transmission jack. N
CAUTION:
When setting transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
5. Remove A/T cross member. Refer to AT-259, "Removal and Installation (YD25DDTi Models)" (for
O
YD25DDTi models) or AT-262, "Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models)" (for VQ40DE models).
6. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to AT-259, "Removal and Installation (YD25DDTi Mod-
els)" (for YD25DDTi models) or AT-262, "Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models)" (for VQ40DE mod-
els). P
AT-241
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
7. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
• Self-sealing bolt (1)
• : Bolt (10)
SCIA7176J
8. Tap rear extension assembly with a soft hammer.
SCIA3432E
9. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing.)
SCIA3431E
10. Remove bearing race (1) from output shaft (2).
JPDIA0057ZZ
11. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/

right.
SCIA5246E
AT-242
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
12. Remove parking gear from output shaft.
A
AT
SCIA5247E
D
13. Remove seal rings from output shaft.
G
SCIA5209E
14. Remove needle bearing (1) from rear extension. H
SCIA6179J K
15. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension.

L
SCIA3423E
16. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from O
rear extension.
SCIA3424E
AT-243
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
17. Remove return spring (1) from parking pawl (2).
SCIA6180J
18. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension.
SCIA3524E
Inspection
• If the contact surface on parking actuator support, parking pawl,
etc. has excessive wear, abrasion, bend, or any other damage,
replace the components.
SCIA5143E
SCIA5144E
Installation
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/T position. Refer to AT-225, "Checking of
A/T Position".
AT-244
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
1. As shown in the figure, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the
rear extension until it is flush. A
CAUTION:
• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
• Do not reuse rear oil seal.
B
AT
SCIA6694E
D
2. Install return spring (1) to parking pawl (2).
G
SCIA6180J
3. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
H
extension.
SCIA3424E
K
4. Install parking actuator support to rear extension.
N
SCIA3423E
5. Install needle bearing (1) to rear extension. O

CAUTION:
Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to AT-
279, "Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust P
Washers and Snap Rings".
SCIA6179J
AT-245
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
6. Install seal rings to output shaft.
SCIA5209E
7. Install parking gear to output shaft
SCIA5247E
8. Install output shaft in transmission case.
SCIA5246E
9. Install bearing race (1) to output shaft (2).
JPDIA0057ZZ
10. Apply Anaerobic Liquid Gasket (Loctite 518) or equivalent to

rear extension assembly as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.
SCIA8156E
AT-246
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
11. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. (With nee-
dle bearing.) A
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear B
extension assembly.
AT
SCIA3431E
D
12. Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to "Components".
• Self-sealing bolt (1) E
• : Bolt (10)
G
SCIA7176J
13. Install engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to AT-259, "Removal and Installation (YD25DDTi Models)" H
(for YD25DDTi models) or AT-262, "Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models)" (for VQ40DE models).
14. Install A/T cross member. Refer to AT-259, "Removal and Installation (YD25DDTi Models)" (for YD25DDTi
models) or AT-262, "Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models)" (for VQ40DE models). I
15. Install control cable to A/T assembly. Refer to AT-223, "Control Cable Removal and Installation".
16. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "Removal and Installation".
17. Install drain plug gasket and drain plug to oil pan. Tighten a necessary drain plug with specified torque. J
Refer to AT-233, "Control Valve with TCM".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
K
18. Pour ATF into A/T assembly. Refer to AT-18, "Changing A/T Fluid".
Rear Oil Seal INFOID:0000000005443833
L
Removal
M
AT-247
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove front propeller shaft (4WD models). Refer to PR-3,
"Removal and Installation".
3. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly (4WD models).
Refer to TF-108, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD
models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models).
SCIA5254E
Installation
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage.
1. As shown in the figure, use the drift to drive rear oil seal into rear
extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly
(4WD models) until it is flush.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse rear oil seal.
2. Install transfer assembly to A/T assembly (4WD models). Refer
to TF-108, "Removal and Installation".
3. Install front propeller shaft (4WD models). Refer to PR-3,
4. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
5. Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-19, "Adjusting A/T Fluid".
SCIA7121E
Output Speed Sensor Component (2WD Models Only) INFOID:0000000005443834

Components
AT-248
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
AT
I
JSDIA1740GB
1. Rear extension 2. A/T 3. Output speed sensor

J
4. Oil pan gasket 5. Clip (for YD25DDTi models) 6. Oil pan mounting bolt
7. Overflow plug 8. Oil pan 9. Magnet
10. Drain plug 11. Drain plug gasket 12. Drain plug gasket
K
*
: Apply Anaerobic Liquid Gasket (Loctite 518) or equivalent.
L
Removal
M
4. Remove control cable from A/T assembly. Refer to AT-223, "Control Cable Removal and Installation". N
5. Remove clips (1) (for YD25DDTi models)), oil pan (2) and oil pan
gasket.
• : Vehicle front O
• : Bolt (22)
• Drain plug (3)
P
JSDIA1579ZZ
AT-249
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
6. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the ATF is very dark, smell burned or contains
foreign particles, friction material (clutches, band) may need
replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates var-
nish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to
stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
• If friction material is detected, replace radiator after repair
of A/T. Refer to CO-41, "Component" (for YD25DDTi
engine), CO-13, "Component" (for VQ40DE engine).
SCIA5199E
7. Support A/T assembly using a transmission jack.

CAUTION:
When setting transmission jack, place wooden blocks to prevent from damaging control valve
with TCM and transmission case.
8. Remove A/T cross member. Refer to AT-259, "Removal and Installation (YD25DDTi Models)" (for
YD25DDTi models) or AT-262, "Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models)" (for VQ40DE models).
9. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
• : Bolt (10)
SCIA7176J
10. Tap rear extension assembly with a soft hammer.
SCIA3432E
11. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing.)
SCIA3431E
AT-250
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
12. Straighten terminal clip ( ) to free the output speed sensor har-
ness. A
CAUTION:
Do not damage connector. B
AT
JSDIA1316ZZ
D
14. Remove output speed sensor (1) from transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
E
• Do not disassemble.
• Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.
• Do not place in an area affected by magnetism. F
G
JPDIA0041ZZ
Installation
CAUTION: H
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/T position. Refer to AT-225, "Checking of
A/T Position".
1. Install output speed sensor (1) in transmission case. Tighten a I
necessary bolt for output speed sensor with specified torque.
Refer to "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION".
CAUTION:
J
edge magnetic area. K
• Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.
JPDIA0041ZZ L
2. Securely fasten output speed sensor (1) harness with terminal

clip ( ). M
3. Connect output speed sensor connector.
JSDIA1316ZZ
AT-251
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
4. Apply Anaerobic Liquid Gasket (Loctite 518) or equivalent to
CAUTION:
mounting surfaces.
SCIA8156E
5. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. (With nee-

dle bearing.)
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pole and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.
SCIA3431E
6. Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque.

Refer to "Components".
: Bolt (10)
7. Install A/T cross member. Refer to AT-259, "Removal and Instal-
lation (YD25DDTi Models)" (for YD25DDTi models) or AT-262,
"Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models)" (for VQ40DE
models).
a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan.
SCIA7176J
CAUTION:
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
YD25DDTi models) to transmission case.
• : Vehicle front
• : Bolt (22)
CAUTION:
JSDIA1579ZZ
AT-252
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. A
Tighten necessary oil pan mounting bolts with specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION:
B
tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Compo-
nents". AT
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket. SCIA4113E
10. Install control cable to A/T assembly. Refer to AT-223, "Control D

Cable Removal and Installation".
11. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "Removal and Installation".
12. Pour ATF into A/T assembly. Refer to AT-18, "Changing A/T Fluid". E
13. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.
AT-253
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
YD25DDTI MODELS
Refer to the figure below for A/T air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
SCIA7258E
1. Air breather tube bracket 2. Clip 3. Bracket

4. A/T air breather hose 5. Air breather tube
A. Paint mark
CAUTION:
• When installing A/T air breather hose, do not to crush or block by folding or bending the hose.
• When inserting A/T air breather hose to air breather tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end
reaches the tube bend portion.
• Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube so that the paint mark is facing upward.
• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing A/T air breather hose to brackets.
• Install A/T air breather hose (1) to A/T breather tube bracket
(2) so that the paint mark (A) is facing upward as shown in the
figure.
NOTE:
• The paint mark (A) on A/T air breather hose (1) indicates “1”.
• The paint mark (A) on transfer control device air breather hose (3)
indicates “2”. (4WD models)
• The paint mark (A) on transfer air breather hose (4) indicates “3”.
(4WD models)
SCIA7312E
VQ40DE MODELS
Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
AT-254
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AT
H
SCIA7122E
1. Air breather tube bracket 2. Bracket 3. Clip

4. A/T air breather hose 5. Air breather tube I
A. Paint mark
J
CAUTION:
• When installing A/T air breather hose, do not to crush or block by folding or bending the hose.
• When inserting A/T air breather hose to air breather tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end
reaches the tube bend portion. K
• Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube so that the paint mark is facing upward.
• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing A/T air breather hose to brackets.
• Install A/T air breather hose (1) to air breather tube bracket (2) L
so that the paint mark (A) is facing upward as shown in the
figure.
NOTE:
• The paint mark (A) on A/T air breather hose (1) indicates “1”. M
• The paint mark (A) on transfer control device air breather hose (3)
indicates “2”. (4WD models)
• The paint mark (A) on transfer air breather hose (4) indicates “3”. N
(4WD models)
SCIA7123E O
AT-255
A/T FLUID COOLER
A/T FLUID COOLER
COMPONENTS
SCIA7214E
1. Radiator core support lower 2. Hose clamp 3. A/T fluid cooler hose (fluid cooler
tube to A/T)
4. Fluid cooler tube 5. A/T fluid cooler hose (lower) 6. A/T fluid cooler hose (upper)
7. A/T fluid cooler hose (radiator to fluid 8. A/T fluid cooler 9. Radiator
cooler tube)
REMOVAL
1. Remove front bumper. Refer to EI-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose (upper) and A/T fluid cooler hose
(lower) from A/T fluid cooler.
SCIA6897E
AT-256
A/T FLUID COOLER
3. Pull A/T fluid cooler (1) toward the front of the vehicle to release
from radiator core support lower (2), and then slide A/T fluid A
cooler (1) downward to remove radiator (3).
AT
SCIA7257E
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-19, "Adjusting A/T E
Fluid".
F
Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*
A/T fluid cooler hose (fluid cooler A/T side Facing upward A
tube to A/T) Fluid cooler tube side Facing to the right of the vehicle B G
A/T fluid cooler side Facing upward B
A/T fluid cooler hose (lower)
Fluid cooler tube side Facing upward C
A/T fluid cooler side Facing upward B
H
A/T fluid cooler hose (upper)
Fluid cooler tube side Facing upward A
A/T fluid cooler hose (radiator to fluid Radiator side Facing upward D
I
cooler tube) Fluid cooler tube side Facing upward E
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
• The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends. J
• When installing hose clamps center line of each clamp tab should
be positioned as shown in the figure.
K
SCIA6914E
AT-257
A/T FLUID COOLER
• Set hose clamps at 5 - 9 mm (0.20 - 0.35 in) from the edge of A/T
fluid cooler hose.
Distance “A”: 5 - 9 mm (0.20 - 0.35 in)

• Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of A/T fluid cooler
tube.
SCIA6919E
• Insert A/T fluid cooler hose (1) 30 - 33 mm (1.18 - 1.30 in) from the
end of A/T fluid cooler tube (2).
Distance “A”: 30 - 33 mm (1.18 - 1.30 in)
SCIA7203E
AT-258
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
A
Removal and Installation (YD25DDTi Models) INFOID:0000000005443837
COMPONENTS B
2WD models
AT
JSDIA1581GB K
1. Engine mounting insulator (rear) 2. A/T cross member 3. Copper washer

4. Fluid cooler tube 5. Bracket 6. Front cross member L
7. A/T assembly
A. For tightening torque, refer to "INSTALLATION".
Refer to GI section to make sure icons (symbol marks) in the figure. Refer to GI-9, "Component". M
AT-259
4WD models
JSDIA1741GB

4. Fluid cooler tube 5. Bracket 6. Front cross member
7. A/T assembly
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When removing A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/
T assembly.
2. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-164, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assem-
bly.
CAUTION:
edge magnetic area.
4. Remove front spoiler center and front engine undercover. Refer
to EI-12.
5. Remove front cross member. SCIA6827E
6. Remove main muffler. Refer to EX-6, "Component (YD Engine

Models without DPF)" or EX-8, "Component (YD Engine Models with DPF)".
8. Remove front propeller shaft. (4WD models) Refer to PR-3, "Removal and Installation".
AT-260
9. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-41, "Removal and Installation".
10. Remove control cable and bracket. Refer to AT-223, "Control Cable Removal and Installation". A
11. Disconnect fluid cooler tube.
12. Remove rear plate cover from rear plate.
B
13. Turn crankshaft to access and remove the four bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from AT
the front of engine.
CAUTION: D
When setting transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to
collide against drain plug.
15. Remove A/T cross member. E
16. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear) from A/T assembly. SCIA6828E
17. Disconnect the following:

• A/T assembly harness connector F
• ATP switch connector (4WD models)
• 4LO switch connector (4WD models)
• Wait detection switch connector (4WD models)
• Transfer control device connector (4WD models) G
18. Support transfer assembly using a transmission jack. (4WD models)
19. Remove the wiring harness from bracket.
H
20. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine assembly.
21. Remove A/T assembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. I
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
22. Remove A/T air breather hose. Refer to AT-254, "Removal and
Installation". J
23. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly. (4WD models)
Refer to TF-108, "Removal and Installation".
K
SCIA2203E
INSPECTION L
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter

• After inserting a torque converter to a A/T, be sure to check dis-
tance “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit. M
Distance “A”: 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more

N
SCIA5694E
P
INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work.
AT-261
• When installing A/T assembly to engine assembly, tighten bolts to
the specified torque using sequence shown.
Bolt No. 1 2*
Number of bolts 9 1
Tightening torque
44 (4.5, 32)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
*: Tightening the bolt with air breather tube bracket.
SCIA7217E
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,
tighten the bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPO-
NENTS".
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the
front of engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter
after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm the
tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts.
• After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
SCIA6828E
several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely with-
out binding.
• Install crankshaft position sensor (POS).
• After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage, A/T fluid level, and A/T positions of A/T. Refer to AT-19,
"Adjusting A/T Fluid", AT-225, "Checking of A/T Position".
Removal and Installation (VQ40DE Models) INFOID:0000000005443838
COMPONENTS
AT-262
2WD models
A
AT
I
JSDIA1742GB

J
4. Bracket 5. Fluid cooler tube 6. Bracket
K
AT-263
4WD models
JSDIA1743GB

4. Fluid cooler tube 5. Bracket 6. Bracket
7. Front cross member 8. A/T assembly
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from
A/T assembly.
2. Remove the LH fender protector.
3. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assem-
bly.
CAUTION:
edge magnetic area.
4. Remove from spoiler center and front engine undercover. Refer
to EI-12.
5. Remove front cross member. LCIA0367E
6. Remove starter motor. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installa-

tion".
8. Remove front propeller shaft. (4WD models) Refer to PR-3, "Removal and Installation".
AT-264
9. Remove left and right exhaust front tubes. Refer to EX-3, "Component (VQ Engine Models)".
10. Remove control cable and bracket. Refer to AT-223, "Control Cable Removal and Installation". A
11. Disconnect fluid cooler tube.
12. Remove rear cover plate.
B
13. Turn the crankshaft to access and remove the four bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed AT
from the front of the engine.
CAUTION: D
When setting transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to
collide against drain plug.
15. Remove A/T cross member. E
16. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear) from A/T assembly. LCIA0335E
17. Tilt the A/T slightly to gain clearance between the body and the A/T, then disconnect the air breather
hoses. Refer to AT-254, "Removal and Installation". F
18. Disconnect the following:
• A/T assembly harness connector
• Transfer control device connector (4WD models)
G
• Wait detection switch connector (4WD models)
• ATP switch connector (4WD models)
• 4LO switch connector (4WD models)
19. Support transfer assembly using a transmission jack. (4WD models) H
20. Remove the wiring harness from the retainers.
21. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine assembly.
I
22. Remove A/T assembly with transfer from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure the A/T assembly to a transmission jack. J
23. Remove transfer from A/T assembly. (4WD models) Refer to TF-
108, "Removal and Installation".
K
L
SCIA2203E
INSPECTION
M
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
• After inserting a torque converter to a A/T, be sure to check dis-
tance “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
N
P
SCIA5694E
INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work.
AT-265
• When installing A/T assembly to engine assembly, tighten bolts to
the specified torque using sequence shown.
Transmission bolts: 75 N·m (7.7 kg-m, 55 ft-lb)
LCIA0370E
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts, and then
tighten the bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPO-
NENTS".
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the
front of engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter
after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm the
tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts.
Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
LCIA0335E
• After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding.
• Install crankshaft position sensor (POS).
• After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage, A/T fluid level, and A/T positions of A/T. Refer to AT-19,
"Adjusting A/T Fluid", AT-225, "Checking of A/T Position".
AT-266
OVERHAUL
OVERHAUL
A
Component INFOID:0000000005443839
YD25DDTi models B
AT
SCIA8028E
1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
AT-267
OVERHAUL
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear
16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race
19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly
22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band
25. Mid carrier assembly 26. Needle bearing 27. Bearing race
28. Rear carrier assembly 29. Needle bearing 30. Mid sun gear
31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch
34. Snap ring 35. Needle bearing 36. High and low reverse clutch hub
37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Needle bearing
: Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1215) or equivalent.
AT-268
OVERHAUL
VQ40DE models
A
AT
SCIA7983E
P
4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear
16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race
AT-269
OVERHAUL
19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly
22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band
31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch
37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Needle bearing
AT-270
OVERHAUL
YD25DDTi models
A
AT
SCIA6982E
P
1. Bearing race 2. High and low reverse clutch assembly 3. Needle bearing
4. Direct clutch assembly 5. Needle bearing 6. Reverse brake dish plate
7. Reverse brake dish plate 8. Reverse brake driven plate 9. N-spring
10. Snap ring 11. Reverse brake retaining plate 12. Reverse brake drive plate
13. Snap ring 14. Spring retainer 15. Return spring
AT-271
OVERHAUL
16. Reverse brake piston 17. D-ring 18. D-ring
VQ40DE models
SCIA7001E
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. High and low reverse clutch assembly
4. Needle bearing 5. Direct clutch assembly 6. Reverse brake dish plate
10. Reverse brake drive plate 11. Reverse brake retaining plate 12. Snap ring
AT-272
OVERHAUL
13. D-ring 14. D-ring 15. Reverse brake piston
16. Return spring 17. Spring retainer 18. Snap ring A
2WD models B
AT
JSDIA1583GB
1. Rear oil seal 2. Self-sealing bolt 3. Rear extension

4. Parking actuator support 5. Parking pawl 6. Return spring
7. Pawl shaft 8. Seal ring 9. Needle bearing
AT-273
OVERHAUL
10. Output speed sensor 11. Parking gear 12. Output shaft
13. Bearing race 14. Needle bearing 15. Manual plate
16. Parking rod 17. Manual shaft oil seal 18. Manual shaft
19. O-ring 20. Band servo anchor end pin 21. Detent spring
22. Spacer 23. Seal ring 24. Snap ring
25. Return spring 26. O-ring 27. Servo assembly
28. Snap ring 29. Sub-harness 30. Control valve with TCM
31. Bracket 32. O-ring 33. Plug
34. Clip (for YD25DDTi models) 35. Oil pan mounting bolt 36. Overflow plug
37. Oil pan 38. Magnet 39. Drain plug
40. Drain plug gasket 41. Oil pan gasket 42. Terminal cord assembly
43. O-ring 44. Retaining pin 45. Transmission case
A. For tightening torque, refer to AT-
338, "Assembly (2)".
*: Apply Anaerobic Liquid Gasket (Loctite 518) or equivalent.
AT-274
OVERHAUL
4WD models
A
AT
JSDIA1584GB
P
1. Self-sealing bolt 2. Terminal bracket 3. Adapter case
4. Parking actuator support 5. Parking pawl 6. Return spring
7. Pawl shaft 8. Rear oil seal 9. Seal ring
10. Needle bearing 11. Gasket 12. Output speed sensor
13. Parking gear 14. Output shaft 15. Bearing race
16. Needle bearing 17. Manual plate 18. Parking rod
AT-275
OVERHAUL
19. Manual shaft oil seal 20. Manual shaft 21. O-ring
22. Band servo anchor end pin 23. Detent spring 24. Spacer
25. Seal ring 26. Return spring 27. O-ring
28. Servo assembly 29. Snap ring 30. Snap ring
31. Sub-harness 32. Control valve with TCM 33. Bracket
34. O-ring 35. Plug 36. Clip (for YD25DDTi models)
37. Oil pan mounting bolt 38. Overflow plug 39. Oil pan
40. Magnet 41. Drain plug 42. Drain plug gasket
43. Oil pan gasket 44. Terminal cord assembly 45. O-ring
46. Retaining pin 47. Transmission case
A. For tightening torque, refer to AT-
338, "Assembly (2)".
AT-276
OVERHAUL
Oil Channel INFOID:0000000005443840
A
2WD models
AT
P
SCIA5185E
AT-277
OVERHAUL
4WD models
SCIA5189E
AT-278
OVERHAUL
Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings
INFOID:0000000005443841 A
YD25DDTi models for 2WD

B
AT
SCIA7317E
AT-279
OVERHAUL
VQ40DE models for 2WD
SCIA7409E
AT-280
OVERHAUL
YD25DDTi models for 4WD
A
AT
SCIA7336E
AT-281
OVERHAUL
VQ40DE models for 4WD
SCIA7446E
AT-282
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
A
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005443842
CAUTION: B
Do not disassemble parts behind drum support. Refer to AT-21, "Cross-Sectional View (YD25DDTi
Models for 2WD)", AT-23, "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 2WD)", AT-22, "Cross-Sectional
View (YD25DDTi Models for 4WD)" or AT-24, "Cross-Sectional View (VQ40DE Models for 4WD)".
AT
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while
pulling straight out.
D
SCIA5010E
3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using a check tool as G

a. Insert a check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race. H
b. When fixing bearing support with a check tool, rotate one-way
clutch spline using a screwdriver.
c. Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace I
torque converter assembly.
SCIA3171E
N
4. Remove tightening bolts (1) for converter housing and transmis-
sion case.
• Self-sealing bolts (2)
• : Bolt (8) O
5. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing. P
SCIA8029E
AT-283
DISASSEMBLY
6. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.
SCIA5011E
7. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmis-

sion case.
SCIA2300E
8. Attach the sliding hammers to oil pump assembly and extract it

evenly from transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Fully tighten the sliding hammer screws.
• Make sure that bearing race is installed to oil pump
assembly edge surface.
SCIA4608E
9. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
SCIA5172E
AT-284
DISASSEMBLY
10. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.
A
AT
SCIA6529E
D
11. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear.
G
SCIA2808E
12. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly. H
NOTE:
Remove front sun gear by rotating left/right.
SCIA5014E
K
13. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.
N
SCIA2470E
14. Remove front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear O
internal gear as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove it with needle bearing. P
SCIA5173E
AT-285
DISASSEMBLY
15. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.
SCIA6512E
16. Remove brake band from transmission case.
SCIA2580E
• To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not

stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the
figure at right.
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
• Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or
burns.
SAT655
17. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a

unit.
SCIA5017E
18. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5174E
AT-286
DISASSEMBLY
19. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.
A
AT
SCIA5176E
D
20. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
G
SCIA5177E
21. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly. H
SCIA5178E K
22. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.

L
SCIA5179E
23. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and O
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove them with bearing races and needle P
bearing.
SCIA5018E
AT-287
DISASSEMBLY
24. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch
assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to high and low
reverse clutch assembly edge surface.
SCIA2306E
25. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.
SCIA5019E
26. Remove needle bearing from drum support.
SCIA5198E
27. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5021E
28. Push A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
SCIA5022E
AT-288
DISASSEMBLY
29. Remove clips (1) (for YD25DDTi engine), oil pan (2) and oil pan
gasket. A
• : Front
• : Bolt (22)
• Drain plug (3) B
AT
SCIA8068E
D
30. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) E
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
• If friction material is detected, replace radiator after repair F
of A/T. Refer to CO-41 (for YD25DDTi engine) or CO-13 (for
VQ40DE engine).
G
SCIA5199E
31. Remove magnets from oil pan. H
SCIA5200E K

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. L
JSDIA1319ZZ
O
33. Straighten terminal clip ( ) to free output speed sensor har-
ness.
JSDIA1320ZZ
AT-289
DISASSEMBLY
34. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
• : Front
Bolt symbol Length [mm (in)] Number of bolts

A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA8077E
35. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with manual valve notch and
SCIA5260E
36. Remove plug (1) with bracket (2) from control valve with TCM.
JSDIA1311ZZ
37. Remove bracket (1) from plug (2).
JSDIA1312ZZ
38. Remove O-ring (1) from plug (2).
JSDIA1313ZZ
AT-290
DISASSEMBLY
39. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
A
AT
SCIA5155E
D
40. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors. E
G
SCIA5447E
41. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve H

with TCM using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA5448E K
42. Disconnect TCM connector (1) and transmission range switch

connector (2).
CAUTION: L
Do not damage connectors.
JSDIA1317ZZ
43. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to O
the following procedures.
AT-291
DISASSEMBLY
a. 2WD models
i. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
• : Bolt (10)
SCIA7176J
ii. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.
SCIA5028E
iii. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing.)
SCIA5029E
b. 4WD models
i. Remove tightening bolts (1) for adapter case assembly and
transmission case. [With terminal bracket (2).]
SCIA7220E
AT-292
DISASSEMBLY
ii. Tap adapter case assembly using a soft hammer.
A
AT
SCIA5204E
D
iii. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (With
needle bearing)
E
G
SCIA5205E
iv. Remove gasket from transmission case. H
SCIA5231E
K
44. Remove bearing race from output shaft.
N
SCIA5245E
45. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/ O

right.
SCIA5030E
AT-293
DISASSEMBLY
46. Remove parking gear from output shaft.
SCIA5247E
47. Remove seal rings from output shaft.
SCIA5209E
48. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
SCIA5031E
: Bolt
CAUTION:
• Do not allow metal filings or any foreign material to get on
the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
JSDIA1321ZZ
50. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flat-
bladed screwdrivers.
NOTE:
Press out snap ring from transmission case oil pan side
gap using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using
another screwdriver.
51. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case.
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.
SCIA5032E
AT-294
DISASSEMBLY
52. Remove N-spring from transmission case.
A
AT
SCIA5214E
D
53. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate
from transmission case.
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, E
replace the plate.
G
SCIA2322E
54. Set SST on spring retainer and remove snap ring (fixing spring H
retainer) from transmission case while compressing return
spring.
I
N
SCIA6843E
55. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission O

case.
SCIA2324E
AT-295
DISASSEMBLY
56. Remove seal rings from drum support.
SCIA3333E
57. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.
SCIA2796E
58. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with com-
pressed air. Refer to AT-277, "Oil Channel".
CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis-
tons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the pistons.
SCIA5047E
59. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.
SCIA6330E
AT-296
DISASSEMBLY
60. Knock out retaining pin using a pin punch [commercial service
tool: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.]. A
AT
SCIA2328E
D
61. Remove manual shaft retaining pin using pair of pliers.
G
SCIA5218E
62. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft. H
SCIA5219E K
63. Remove parking rod from manual plate.

L
SCIA5220E
64. Remove manual shaft from transmission case. O
SCIA5716E
AT-297
DISASSEMBLY
65. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case.
SCIA2331E
66. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case.
SCIA5248E
67. Remove snap ring from transmission case using pair of snap
ring pliers.
SCIA2333E
68. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission

case.
SCIA5679E
69. Remove return spring from servo assembly.
SCIA5717E
AT-298
DISASSEMBLY
70. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.
A
AT
SCIA5719E
D
71. Remove needle bearing (1) from rear extension (2WD models)
or adapter case (4WD models).
E
G
SCIA6179J
72. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD H

models) or adapter case (4WD models).
SCIA3423E K
73. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from
rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models).
L
SCIA3424E
74. Remove return spring (1) from parking pawl (2). O
SCIA6180J
AT-299
DISASSEMBLY
75. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension (2WD models) or
SCIA7219E
AT-300
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
A
Oil Pump INFOID:0000000005443843
COMPONENTS B
AT
SCIA6920E
H
4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal
DISASSEMBLY I
1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover.
L
SCIA5228E
2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screw- M

driver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. N
SCIA2840E P
AT-301
3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
SCIA2841E
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.
SCIA5230E
ASSEMBLY
1. Install O-ring to oil pump cover.
SCIA5230E
2. Install O-ring to oil pump housing.
SCIA2841E
AT-302
3. Install oil pump housing oil seal to oil pump housing until it is
flush using the drift. A
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse oil seal.
• Apply ATF to oil seal.
B
AT
SCIA4609E
D
4. Install oil pump housing to oil pump cover.
5. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order shown in
the figure after temporarily tightening them. Refer to "COMPO- E
NENTS".
G
SCIA6388E
Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch INFOID:0000000005443844 H
COMPONENTS
I
N
SCIA3114E
1. Front sun gear 2. 3rd one-way clutch 3. Snap ring

O
DISASSEMBLY
AT-303
1. Remove snap ring from front sun gear using a flat-bladed screw-
driver
SCIA3110E
2. Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.
SCIA3111E
INSPECTION
3rd One-way Clutch
• Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace 3rd one-way clutch.
Front Sun Gear Snap Ring
• Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace snap ring.
Front Sun Gear
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace front sun gear.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear.
SCIA3111E
AT-304
2. Install snap ring in front sun gear using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
A
AT
SCIA3110E
D
3. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch.
a. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.
b. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking E
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in figure, check installation direction of 3rd
F
one-way clutch.
SCIA3131E
H
Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear INFOID:0000000005443845
COMPONENTS I
AT-305
YD25DDTi models
SCIA7070E
1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Needle bearing
7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate
10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Drive plate
13. Rear internal gear
AT-306
VQ40DE models
A
AT
L
SCIA6734E
1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing M

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Snap ring
7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate
10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Drive plate N
O
DISASSEMBLY
AT-307
1. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers.
2. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.
3. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly.
SCIA5339E
a. Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly.
SCIA5232E
b. Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly.
SCIA5233E
c. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
SCIA5234E
4. Disassemble input clutch assembly.

a. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.
SCIA5235E
AT-308
b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.
A
AT
SCIA2853E
D
c. Remove snap ring from input clutch drum using a flat-bladed
screwdriver
d. Remove retaining plate, drive plates and driven plates from input E
clutch drum.
G
SCIA2864E
INSPECTION H
Front Carrier Snap Ring

CAUTION: I
Input Clutch Snap Ring
J
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace input clutch assembly.
K
Input Clutch Drum
• Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace input clutch assembly. L
Input Clutch Drive Plates
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION: M
Input Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. N
CAUTION:
Front Carrier O
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace front carrier assembly. P
Rear Internal Gear
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace rear internal gear assembly.
ASSEMBLY
AT-309
1. Install input clutch.
a. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in input
clutch drum.
• Snap ring (1)
• Retaining plate (2)
• Drive plate (3)
• Driven plate (4)
• Drive plate/Driven plate: 7/7
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates.
SCIA7133E
b. Install snap ring in input clutch drum using a flat-bladed screw-

driver.
SCIA2864E
c. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly.
SCIA2853E
d. Install O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly.
SCIA5235E
AT-310
2. Install front carrier assembly.
a. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly. A
CAUTION:
B
AT
SCIA5234E
D
b. Install needle bearing in front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
E
279, "Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust
G
SCIA5233E
c. Install bearing race in front carrier assembly.

H
d. Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly.
SCIA5232E
K
3. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers.
4. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly in rear
internal gear. L
N
SCIA5339E
Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub INFOID:0000000005443846 O
COMPONENTS
P
AT-311
YD25DDTi models
SCIA7072E
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring

4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear
VQ40DE models
SCIA7071E
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring

4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing races from high and low reverse clutch hub.
AT-312
• YD25DDTi models
A
AT
SCIA5238E
D
• VQ40DE models
G
SCIA2854E
2. Remove snap ring from mid sun gear assembly using pair of H
snap ring pliers.
CAUTION:
I
SCIA2855E K
3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly. L
SCIA2856E
AT-313
a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.
SCIA2857E
4. Remove rear sun gear assembly (1) from mid sun gear assem-
bly.
SCIA8155E
a. Remove snap ring from rear sun gear using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
SCIA2859E
b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.
SCIA4633E
5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.
SCIA2861E
AT-314
INSPECTION
A
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring
CAUTION: B
1st One-way Clutch
• Check frictional surface for wear or damage. AT
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace 1st one-way clutch.
Mid Sun Gear D
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace mid sun gear.
E
Rear Sun Gear
CAUTION: F
If necessary, replace rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
• Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. G
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace high and low reverse clutch hub.
H
ASSEMBLY
1. Install seal rings to mid sun gear.
I
SCIA2861E
L
2. Install 1st one-way clutch to rear sun gear.
O
SCIA4633E
AT-315
3. Install snap ring to rear sun gear using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA2859E
4. Install rear sun gear assembly (1) to mid sun gear assembly.
SCIA8155E
5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub.

CAUTION:
SCIA2857E
6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assem-
bly.
SCIA2856E
7. Install snap ring to mid sun gear assembly using pair of snap
ring pliers.
CAUTION:
SCIA2855E
AT-316
8. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.
A
a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
b. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION: B
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of
1st one-way clutch.
AT
SCIA3132E
D
9. Install needle bearing and bearing races to high and low reverse clutch hub.
CAUTION:
Take care with order of bearing races. E
• YD25DDTi models
H
SCIA5238E
• VQ40DE models I
SCIA2854E L
High and Low Reverse Clutch INFOID:0000000005443847
COMPONENTS M
AT-317
SCIA5239E
1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.
SCIA5240E
2. Remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch drum using
a flat-bladed screwdriver.
3. Remove retaining plate, drive plates and driven plates from high
and low reverse clutch drum.
SCIA2868E
INSPECTION
• Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly if necessary.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
AT-318
ASSEMBLY
1. Install driven plates, drive plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum. A
CAUTION:
• YD25DDTi models B
- Snap ring (1)
- Retaining plate (2)
- Drive plate (3)
AT
- Driven plate (4)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 4/4
SCIA6735E E
• VQ40DE models
- Snap ring (1) F
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 5/5 G
SCIA7134E
I
2. Install snap ring in high and low reverse clutch drum using a flat-
bladed screwdriver.
J
L
SCIA2868E
3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum.

M
SCIA5240E
P
Direct Clutch INFOID:0000000005443848
COMPONENTS
AT-319
YD25DDTi models
SCIA7213E
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate
VQ40DE models
SCIA7128E
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove snap rings from direct clutch drum using a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
2. Remove retaining plate, drive plates and driven plates from
direct clutch drum.
SCIA2868E
INSPECTION
AT-320
• Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary.
Direct Clutch Snap Rings A
Direct Clutch Drive Plates
B
Direct Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. AT
ASSEMBLY
1. Install driven plates, drive plates and retaining plate in direct clutch drum. D
CAUTION:
• YD25DDTi models E
K
SCIA5243E
• VQ40DE models L
- Snap ring (1)
- Drive plate (3) M
- Driven plate (4)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 5/5
N
O
SCIA7407E
AT-321
2. Install snap rings in direct clutch drum using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
SCIA2868E
AT-322
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
A
Assembly (1) INFOID:0000000005443849
1. As shown in the figure, use a drift [commercial service tool: 22 B

mm (0.87 in) dia.] to drive manual shaft oil seals into transmis-
sion case until it is flush.
CAUTION:
AT
• Do not reuse manual shaft oil seals.
• Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.
SCIA5259E E
2. Install detent spring and spacer to transmission case and then

tighten mounting dolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-267,
F
"Component".
SCIA5248E
I
3. Install manual shaft to transmission case.
L
SCIA5716E
4. Install parking rod to manual plate.

M
SCIA5220E
P
AT-323
ASSEMBLY
5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.
SCIA5219E
6. Install retaining pin into manual plate and manual shaft.

a. Fit pinhole of manual plate to pinhole of manual shaft with a pin
punch.
b. Tap retaining pin into manual plate using a hammer.
CAUTION:
Drive retaining pin to 2 ± 0.5 mm (0.08 ± 0.020 in) over man-
ual plate.
SCIA7165E
7. Install retaining pin into transmission case and manual shaft.

a. Fit pinhole of transmission case to pinhole of manual shaft with a
pin punch.
b. Tap retaining pin into the transmission case using a hammer.
CAUTION:
Drive retaining pin to 5 ± 1 mm (0.20 ± 0.04 in) over trans-
mission case.
SCIA2427E
8. Install O-rings to servo assembly.
SCIA7166E
9. Install return spring to servo assembly.
SCIA5717E
AT-324
ASSEMBLY
10. Install servo assembly in transmission case.
A
AT
SCIA5679E
D
11. Install snap ring to transmission case using pair of snap ring pli-
ers.
E
G
SCIA2333E
12. Install D-rings in reverse brake piston. H
SCIA6330E K
13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case.

L
SCIA2325E
14. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface. O
SCIA2796E
AT-325
ASSEMBLY
15. Install seal rings to drum support.
SCIA3333E
16. Install return spring and spring retainer in transmission case.
SCIA2324E
17. Set the SST on spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing spring
retainer) in transmission case while compressing return spring.
CAUTION:
Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so
that snap ring tension is slightly weak.
SCIA6843E
18. Install reverse brake dish plates, driven plates and drive plates
in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Take care with order and direction of plates.
• YD25DDTi models
- Snap ring (1)
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4)
- Driven plate (5)
- Dish plate (6)
SCIA8087E
- Dish plate (7)
AT-326
ASSEMBLY
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 7/7(1+6)
• VQ40DE models A
- Snap ring (1)
- Drive plate (3)
B
- Driven plate (4)
- Dish plate (5)
- Dish plate (6)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 6/6 AT
SCIA8088E D
19. Assemble N-spring.

20. Install reverse brake retaining plate in transmission case. E
SCIA5249E
K
21. Install snap ring in transmission case.

L
SCIA2439E
O
22. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate. Refer to
“Parts Information” for retaining plate selection.
P
Specified clearance “A”
Standard: Refer to AT-347, "Reverse Brake".
SCIA3129E
AT-327
ASSEMBLY
23. Install needle bearing to transmission case.
CAUTION:
SCIA5031E
24. Install output speed sensor (1) to transmission case and tighten
bolt ( ) to specified torque. Refer to AT-267, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Do not subject sensor to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Do not disassemble sensor.
• Do not allow metal filings or any foreign material to get on
the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Do not place sensor in an area affected by magnetism.
JSDIA1321ZZ
25. As shown in the figure, drive to rear oil seal into rear extension
(2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models) until it is flush
using a drift.
SCIA7221E
SCIA6180J
AT-328
ASSEMBLY
27. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). A
AT
SCIA3424E
D
28. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD models)
or adapter case (4WD models).
E
G
SCIA3423E
29. Install needle bearing (1) to rear extension (2WD models) or H

SCIA6179J K
30. Install seal rings to output shaft.

L
SCIA5209E
31. Install parking gear to output shaft. O
SCIA5247E
AT-329
ASSEMBLY
32. Install output shaft in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
look similar. (Thinner end is front side.)
SCIA5030E
33. Install bearing race to output shaft.
SCIA5245E
34. Install rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to the
following procedures.
a. 2WD models
i. Apply Anaerobic Liquid Gasket (Loctite 518) or equivalent to
CAUTION:
mounting surfaces.
SCIA8156E
ii. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case.

CAUTION:
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.
SCIA5029E
AT-330
ASSEMBLY
iii. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to AT-267, "Component". A
• : Bolt (10)
B
AT
SCIA7176J
D
b. 4WD models
i. Install gasket onto transmission case.
CAUTION: E
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from the transmission case and adapter case assembly
mounting surfaces.
F
G
SCIA5231E
ii. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case. H

CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between parking pawl and park-
ing actuator support when assembling adapter case assem-
bly. I
SCIA5205E
K
iii. Tighten adapter case assembly mounting bolts (1) to the speci-
fied torque [With terminal bracket (2)]. Refer to AT-267, "Compo-
nent". L
SCIA7220E
AT-331
ASSEMBLY
35. Install needle bearing in drum support edge surface.
SCIA5198E
36. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake.

CAUTION:
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place.
SCIA5019E
37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch.
SCIA2306E
38. Align drive plate using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA3169E
39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.
SCIA5018E
AT-332
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: A
Make sure that portion “A” of high and low reverse clutch
drum protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond por-
tion “B” of rear sun gear.
B
AT
D
SCIA3130E
40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly.

E
SCIA5179E
H
41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly.
K
SCIA5178E
42. Install rear carrier assembly in direct clutch drum. L
SCIA2462E O
AT-333
ASSEMBLY
43. Install needle bearing (rear side) in mid carrier assembly.
SCIA5177E
44. Install needle bearing (front side) to mid carrier assembly.
SCIA5176E
45. Install mid carrier assembly in rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5017E
46. Install front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear
internal gear as a unit.
SCIA5173E
47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly.
SCIA5269E
AT-334
ASSEMBLY
48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission
case. A
AT
SCIA6512E
D
49. Install brake band in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installa- E
tion faces servo side.
G
SCIA5498E
50. Install front sun gear to front carrier assembly. H

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to front sun gear bearing and 3rd one-way clutch
end bearing.
I
SCIA5014E K
51. Install needle bearing to front sun gear.

L
SCIA2808E
52. Adjust brake band tilting using a clip so that brake band contacts O
front sun gear drum evenly.
SCIA5033E
AT-335
ASSEMBLY
53. Adjust brake band.
a. Loosen lock nut.
b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to the specified torque.
: 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)

c. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns.
d. Holding band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to the spec-
ified torque. Refer to AT-267, "Component".
SCIA5498E
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005443850
TOTAL END PLAY

• Measure clearance between front sun gear and bearing race for oil
pump cover.
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within
specifications.
SCIA2810E
1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension

“J”.
SCIA7073E
a. Measure dimension “K”.
SCIA7074E
AT-336
ASSEMBLY
b. Measure dimension “L”.
c. Calculate dimension “J”. A
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of

transmission case and needle bearing mating B
surface of front sun gear.
J=K–L
AT
SCIA5352E
D
2. Measure dimensions “M1” and “M2” and then calculate dimen-
sion “M”.
E
G
SCIA3125E
a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly. H
SCIA3124E K
b. Measure dimension “M1”.
L
SCIA3126E
c. Measure dimension “M2”. O
SCIA3127E
AT-337
ASSEMBLY
d. Calculate dimension “M”.
“M”: Distance between transmission case fitting sur-

face of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump.
M = M1 – M2
SCIA3125E
3. Adjust total end play “T1”.
T1 = J – M
Total end play “T1”: Refer to AT-348, "Total End Play".
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications. Refer to “Parts Information” for bearing
race selection.
SCIA2810E
Assembly (2) INFOID:0000000005443851
1. Install O-ring to oil pump assembly.
SCIA5172E
2. Install bearing race to oil pump assembly.
SCIA6529E
AT-338
ASSEMBLY
3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case.
CAUTION: A
Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.
AT
SCIA2811E
D
4. Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1215) or equivalent to oil
pump assembly as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
E
from the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting
bolt mounting surfaces.
F
G
SCIA4636E
5. Tighten oil pump mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to

H
AT-267, "Component".
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.
I
SCIA2300E
K
6. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.
N
SCIA5011E
7. Install converter housing to transmission case. Tighten con- O

verter housing bolts (1) to the specified torque. Refer to AT-267,
"Component".
• : Bolt (8) P
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolts (2).
SCIA8029E
AT-339
ASSEMBLY
8. Make sure that brake band (1) does not close input speed sen-
sor hole (A).
JSDIA1318ZZ
9. Connect TCM connector (1) and transmission range switch con-

nector (2).
JSDIA1317ZZ
10. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with

TCM.
SCIA5450E
11. Connect TCM connectors.
SCIA5447E
12. Install O-ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5155E
AT-340
ASSEMBLY
13. Install new O-ring (1) in plug (2).
A
AT
JSDIA1313ZZ
D
14. Install plug (2) to bracket (1).
G
JSDIA1312ZZ
15. Install plug (1) [with bracket (2)] to control valve with TCM and H
tighten bolt ( ) to specified torque. Refer to AT-267, "Compo-
nent".
CAUTION:
I
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve.
JSDIA1311ZZ K
16. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
1 : Brake band
L
CAUTION:
• Make sure that input speed sensor is securely installed
into input speed sensor hole (A). M
so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
• Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve N
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
JSDIA1318ZZ
O
P
SCIA5035E
AT-341
ASSEMBLY
17. Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) to control valve with TCM.
: Front

A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA8077E
18. Tighten bolt (1), (2) and (3) temporarily to prevent dislocation.
After that tighten them in order (A → B → C), and then tighten
other bolts. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified
torque.
: Front
Bolt symbol A B C
Number of bolts 5 6 1
SCIA8078E
Length mm (in) 42 (1.65) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57)
Tightening torque With ATF applied

7.9 (0.81, 70)
N·m (km-g, in-lb) 7.9 (0.81, 70)
19. Connect output speed sensor connector (1).
JSDIA1319ZZ
20. Securely fasten output speed sensor harness with terminal clip
( ).
JSDIA1320ZZ
AT-342
ASSEMBLY
21. Pull down A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: A
AT
SCIA5299E
D
22. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
G
SCIA5300E
23. Install magnets onto oil pan.

H
SCIA5200E
K
a. Install oil pan gasket to transmission case.
CAUTION: L
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface. M
YD25DDTi models) to transmission case.
• : Vehicle front N
• : Bolt (22)
CAUTION:
O
from oil pan mounting surface. P
JSDIA1579ZZ
AT-343
ASSEMBLY
Refer to AT-267, "Component".
CAUTION:
tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-267,
"Component".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
SCIA4113E
26. Install torque converter.

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
• Approximately 2 liter (1-3/4 Imp qt) of ATF is required for a
new torque converter.
• When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of ATF as was drained.
SAT428DA
b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-

verter with notches of oil pump.
CAUTION:
Install torque converter while rotating it.
SCIA5010E
c. Measure distance “A” to make sure that torque converter is in

proper position.
SCIA5694E
AT-344
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
General Specification INFOID:0000000005443852
B
YD25DDTi engine VQ40DE engine
Applied model
2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD
Automatic transmission model RE5R05A AT
3FX4C, 3FX4D,
Transmission model code number 94X7B 94X5E, 3DX8E 3FX5A, 3FX9A
3FX9D
Stall torque ratio 2.0 : 1 1.76 : 1 D
1st 3.827 3.842
2nd 2.368 2.353
E
3rd 1.519 1.529
Transmission gear ratio
4th 1.000 1.000
5th 0.834 0.839 F
Reverse 2.613 2.765
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*
G
Fluid capacity 10.3 liter (9-1/8 Imp qt)
CAUTION:
If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmis-
H
sion fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic trans-
mission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
*: Refer to MA-25.
I
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000005443853
2WD MODELS J

Vehicle speed [km/h (MPH)] K
Throttle position
41 - 45 65 - 73 107 - 117 158 - 168 154 - 164 97 - 107 50 - 58 19 - 23
Full throttle L
(25 - 28) (41 - 46) (67 - 73) (99 - 105) (96 - 103) (61 - 67) (31 - 38) (12 - 14)
30 - 34 48 - 52 73 - 81 105 - 113 58 - 66 41 - 49 23 - 29 8 - 12
Half throttle
(19 - 21) (29 - 33) (46 - 51) (66 - 71) (36 - 41) (26 - 31) (14 - 18) (5 - 8)
M
Engine model VQ40DE

N
Throttle position
62 - 66 100 - 108 156 - 166 241 - 251 237 - 247 145 - 155 88 - 96 42 - 46 O
Full throttle
(39 - 41) (63 - 68) (98 - 104) (151 - 157) (148 - 154) (91 - 97) (55 - 60) (26 - 29)
50 - 54 82 - 88 126 - 134 153 - 161 117 - 125 71 - 79 50 - 56 11 - 15
Half throttle
(31 - 34) (51 - 55) (79 - 84) (96 - 101) (73 - 78) (44 - 49) (31 - 35) (7 - 9)
P
4WD MODELS
AT-345

Throttle position
38 - 42 61 - 69 101 - 111 149 - 159 145 - 155 92 - 102 47 - 55 18 - 22
Full throttle
(24 - 26) (38 - 43) (63 - 69) (93 - 99) (91 - 97) (58 - 64) (29 - 34) (11 - 14)
28 - 32 43 - 49 69 - 77 99 - 107 55 - 63 41 - 49 23 - 29 8 - 12
Half throttle
(18 - 20) (27 - 31) (43 - 48) (62 - 67) (34 - 39) (26 - 31) (14 - 18) (5 - 8)
Engine model VQ40DE
Throttle Vehicle speed [km/h (MPH)]

Tire size
position D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D4 D4 → D5 D5 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1
Full 55 - 59 89 - 97 138 - 148 214 - 224 210 - 220 128 - 138 77 - 85 36 - 40
throttle (34 - 37) (56 - 61) (86 - 93) (134 - 140) (131 - 138) (80 - 86) (48 - 53) (23 - 25)
235/70 R16
Half 44 - 48 72 - 78 112 - 120 136 - 144 104 - 112 63 - 71 45 - 51 11 - 15
throttle (28 - 30) (45 - 49) (70 - 75) (85 - 90) (65 - 70) (39 - 44) (28 - 32) (7 - 9)
Full 59 - 63 95 - 103 147 - 157 228 - 238 224 - 234 137 - 147 83 - 91 40 - 44
255/70 R16 throttle (37 - 39) (59 - 64) (92 - 98) (143 - 149) (140 - 146) (86 - 92) (52 - 57) (25 - 28)
255/65 R17 Half 47 - 51 77 - 83 119 - 127 144 - 152 111 - 119 67 - 75 48 - 54 11 - 15
throttle (29 - 32) (48 - 52) (74 - 79) (90 - 95) (69 - 74) (42 - 47) (30 - 34) (7 - 9)
2WD MODELS

Throttle position
Closed throttle 29 - 37 (18 - 23) 26 - 34 (16 - 21)
Half throttle 128 - 136 (80 - 85) 109 - 117 (68 - 73)
Engine model VQ40DE

Throttle position
Closed throttle 68 - 76 (43 - 48) 65 - 73 (41 - 46)
Half throttle 194 - 202 (121 - 126) 151 - 159 (94 - 99)
4WD MODELS

Throttle position
Closed throttle 27 - 35 (17 - 21) 24 - 32 (15 - 20)
Half throttle 121 - 129 (75 - 80) 103 - 111 (64 - 69)
AT-346
A
Engine model VQ40DE
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” B
Closed throttle 60 - 68 (37 - 42) 57 - 65 (36 - 41)
235/70 R16
Half throttle 173 - 181 (108 - 113) 134 - 142 (84 - 89)
AT
255/70 R16 Closed throttle 64 - 72 (40 - 45) 61 - 69 (38 - 43)
255/65 R17 Half throttle 184 - 192 (115 - 120) 143 - 151 (89 - 94)
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF) D
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000005443855

E
Applied model YD25DDTi VQ40DE

F
Stall speed 2,800 - 3,200 rpm 2,200 - 2,500 rpm
Line Pressure INFOID:0000000005443856
Line pressure [kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)]

Engine speed
“R” position “D” position H
At idle speed 425 - 465 (4.3 - 4.6, 4.3 - 4.7, 62 - 67) 379 - 428 (3.8 - 4.3, 3.9 - 4.4, 55 - 62)
At stall speed 1,605 - 1,950 (16.0 - 19.5, 16.4 - 19.9, 233 - 283) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.1 - 15.0, 13.4 - 15.3, 190 - 218)
I
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000005443857
J
Name Condition CONSULT “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F) 3.3 V 15 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature sensor 20°C (68°F) 2.7 V 6.5 kΩ K
80°C (176°F) 0.9 V 0.9 kΩ
Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005443858

L
Name Condition Data (Approx.)

M
Output speed sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 185 Hz
Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005443859
Data (Ap-
Name Condition
prox.)
O
Input speed sensor 1 When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”.
1.3 kHz
Input speed sensor 2 When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”.
P
Reverse Brake INFOID:0000000005443860
Model code number 94X5E. 94X7B 3FX4C, 3FX4D, 3FX5A

Number of drive plates 7 6
AT-347
Model code number 94X5E. 94X7B 3FX4C, 3FX4D, 3FX5A
Number of driven plates 7(1+6) 6
Clearance mm (in) Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Total End Play INFOID:0000000005443861
Total end play [mm (in)] 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)
AT-348
APPLICATION NOTICE
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [7AT: RE7R01B]
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A

APPLICATION NOTICE
How to Check A/T Type INFOID:0000000008197552
B
Check the A/T type to confirm the service information in TM section.
AT
A/T type
Service information
Input clutch dish plate High and low reverse clutch dish plate
RE7R01B (TYPE 1) Not installed Not installed D
RE7R01B (TYPE 2) Installed Installed
*: Refer to AT-609, "General Specification" for the application of each dish plate.
E
AT-349
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006362983
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM” and “SEAT BELTS” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Battery Service (for V9X Models) INFOID:0000000006362984
When disconnect the battery cable, pay attention to the following.

• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is run-
ning.
• Before disconnecting battery cables, turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 4 minutes.
• After high-load driving, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery cable.
NOTE:
• Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after
the ignition switch is turned OFF.
SEF289H
• Example of high-load driving
- Driving for 30 minutes or more at 140 km/h (86 MPH) or more.
- Driving for 30 minutes or more on a steep slope.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000006362985
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable

from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-
ing the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
SEF289H
AT-350
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION A

PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-25, "Fluids B
and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi- AT
nance, etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
SAT652J
D
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission. E
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled. F
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs G
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
H
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system. I
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to AT-437, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehi-
cle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed. J
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selec-
tor lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts.
K
AT-351
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000006362986
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
ST33400001 • Installing rear oil seal (2WD)
(J-26082) • Installing oil pump housing oil seal
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
NT086
KV31102400 • Installing reverse brake return spring retainer

(J-34285 and J-34285-87) • Removing and installing 2346 brake spring retain-
Clutch spring compressor er
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
NT423
KV31103800 Removing and installing front brake spring retainer

Clutch spring compressor
1. M12×1.75P
JSDIA1749ZZ
ST25850000 Remove oil pump assembly

(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12X1.75P
NT422
AT-352
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000006362987
Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts B
AT
PBIC0190E D
Drift Installing manual shaft oil seals
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
E
F
NT083
Drift Installing rear oil seal (4WD)

a: 64 mm (2.52 in) dia. G
SCIA5338E
I
Pin punch Remove retaining pin
a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
K
NT410
1. 315268E000* A/T fluid changing and adjustment

O-ring
2. 310811EA5A* L
Charging pipe
JSDIA1332ZZ
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. N
AT-353
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006362988
JSDIA1910GB
1. A/T position indicator 2. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
4. Stop lamp switch 5. Joint connector 6. Output speed sensor*1
7. Control valve & TCM*2 8. Manual mode position select switch 9. Manual mode position select switch
(shift-down) (shift-up)
10. Manual mode select switch 11. G sensor
A. Combination meter B. Accelerator pedal, upper C. Brake pedal, upper
D. A/T assembly E. A/T shift selector assembly F. Under center console
*1 : Output speed sensor is installed in A/T assembly.
*2 : Control valve & TCM is installed in A/T assembly.
NOTE:
The following components are included in the control valve & TCM (7).
• TCM
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-354
COMPONENT PARTS
• Transmission range switch
• Direct clutch solenoid valve A
B
• Low brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Line pressure solenoid valve AT
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000006362989
D
Name Function
TCM AT-355, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM" E
Transmission range switch AT-355, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"
Output speed sensor AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor"
F
AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor"
A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor" G
Input clutch solenoid valve AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Front brake solenoid valve AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve"
H
Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Low brake solenoid valve AT-356, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve" I
Anti-interlock solenoid valve AT-357, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve"
2346 brake solenoid valve AT-357, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve"
J
Line pressure solenoid valve AT-357, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-357, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-357, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor" K
Manual mode switch AT-357, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch"
G sensor AT-357, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor"
A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. L
Starter relay SC-35, "System Description"
Stop lamp switch AT-358, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description"
M
ECM EC-1238, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram"
BCM BCS-4, "System Description"
Combination meter DI-4, "System Description" N
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-8, "Functions"
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000006362990 O
• The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
P
• The TCM is integral with the control valve assembly and built into the A/T assembly.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000006362991
• The transmission range switch incorporates four contact switches. Each contact switch transmits an ON/
OFF signal to the TCM.
• The TCM judges a select lever position from a combination of ON/OFF signals transmitted from each con-
tact switch.
AT-355
COMPONENT PARTS

Select lever position
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
P OFF OFF OFF OFF
R ON OFF OFF ON
N ON ON OFF OFF
D and M ON ON ON ON
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000006362992
The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000006362993
The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/
T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000006362994
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006362995
• The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
• The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006362996
• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-
sion range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006362997
• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006362998
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted
from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006362999
• The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-
sion range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
AT-356
COMPONENT PARTS
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006363000
A
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake.
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006363001
B
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted AT
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
D
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006363002
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4, E
M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sensor and accelerator
pedal position sensor. Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000006363003
F
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
G
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor INFOID:0000000006363004
• The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly.
H
• The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit
the voltage signal to the ECM. Then, the TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via
CAN communication. I
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000006363005
• The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position select switch (shift-up/shift-down)] is installed in J
the A/T shift selector assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate side or manual shift gate side) of the selec-
tor lever and transmits a manual mode signal or a non-manual mode signal to the combination meter. Then, K
the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-manual mode signal from the combination meter.
• The position select switch (shift-up) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-up side of the manual
shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift up signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM receives a
manual mode shift up signal from the combination meter. L
• The position select switch (shift-down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-down side of the
manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift down signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM
receives a manual mode shift down signal from the combination meter. M
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor INFOID:0000000006363006
• The G sensor detects the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle. N
• The G sensor converts the inclination angle and acceleration to the voltage signal and transmits it to ECM.
The TCM calculates the voltage signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication line and judges
the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle. O
AT-357
COMPONENT PARTS
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006363007
JSDIA1851ZZ
1. Shift lock release button 2. Shift lock solenoid 3. Park position switch
4. Stop lamp switch
A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Shift lock unit C. Brake pedal, upper
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000006363008
Component Function
Shift lock solenoid It operates according to the signal from the stop lamp switch and moves the lock lever.
Park position switch It detects that the selector lever is in “P” position.
It moves according to the operation of the shift lock solenoid and performs the release of the shift
Lock lever
lock.
Detent rod It links with the selector button and restricts the selector lever movement.
Shift lock release button It moves the lock lever forcibly.
AT-358
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
A
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000006363009
B
AT
JSDIA1774ZZ
J
1. Low brake 2. Drum support 3. Reverse brake
4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. 2nd one-way clutch
7.*1 Rear carrier 8. Mid carrier 9. Input clutch K
10.*2 Front sun gear 11.*3 Front carrier 12. Under drive carrier
13. 1st one-way clutch 14. Front brake 15. 2346 brake
L
16.*4 Input shaft 17. Torque converter 18. Oil pump
19.*2 Under drive sun gear 20.*3 Under drive internal gear 21.*4 Front internal gear
22. Mid sun gear 23.*1 Mid internal gear 24. Rear sun gear M
25. Rear internal gear 26. High and low reverse clutch hub 27. Control valve & TCM
28. Parking gear 29. Adapter case 30. Output shaft
*1: 7 and 23 are one unit. N
*2: 10 and 19 are one unit.
*3: 11 and 20 are one unit.
*4: 16 and 21 are one unit. O
AT-359
TRANSMISSION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000006363010
JSDIA0877GB
TRANSMISSION : System Description INFOID:0000000006363011
DESCRIPTION
AT-360
With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmis-
sion for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc A
brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BRAKE CHART
B
AT
L
JSDIA1402GB
POWER TRANSMISSION M
“N” Position
AT-361
JSDIA0880GB
Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
AT-362
AT
JSDIA1277GB
• The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not P
transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
“D1” and “DS1” Positions
AT-363
JSDIA0866GB
• The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
AT-364
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft
Under drive planetary gear

AT
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution D
Acceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier
Rear planetary gear E

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
H
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
gear rear carrier I
“M1” Position
AT-365
JSDIA0867GB
• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
NOTE:
The front brake operates only while coasting.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
AT-366
Front planetary gear A
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
B
AT
Condition — Fixed Input/Output D
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
ternal gear front carrier E
Rear planetary gear
F

Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the G
Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear H
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the I
gear rear carrier
“D2” and “DS2” Positions

J
AT-367
JSDIA0868GB
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
AT-368
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
gear input shaft

AT
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution D
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the

G
Mid planetary gear
H
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
gear rear carrier I
“M2” Position
AT-369
JSDIA0869GB
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
AT-370
B
gear input shaft

AT

G
Mid planetary gear
H
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
rear carrier I
“D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions
AT-371
JSDIA0870GB
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
AT-372
B
gear input shaft

AT

Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear rear internal gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
H
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
rear carrier I
AT-373
JSDIA0871GB
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
AT-374
B
gear input shaft

AT

rear internal gear rear internal gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
H
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
mid internal gear mid internal gear rear carrier I
AT-375
JSDIA0872GB
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
AT-376
Rear planetary gear
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear A
Condition — input/Output —
B
rear carrier input shaft rear carrier
Mid planetary gear

AT
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution D
mid internal gear mid internal gear input shaft
“D6”, “DS6” and “M6” Positions E
AT-377
JSDIA0873GB
AT-378
B
gear input shaft
Rear planetary gear

AT
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution D
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
input shaft front carrier
Mid planetary gear E

Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
input shaft
G
AT-379
JSDIA0874GB
• The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake.

• Each planetary gear enters state described below.
AT-380
B

AT
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution D
Acceleration from under drive inter- Same number of revolution as the
nal gear front carrier

Condition — Input/Output Input
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
input shaft under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
H
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
input shaft I
“R” Position
AT-381
JSDIA0875GB
• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
NOTE:
The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less.
• The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake.
• The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch
and the high and low reverse clutch.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less.
AT-382
Front planetary gear A
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
B
AT
Condition — Fixed Input/Output D
Acceleration from under drive inter- Same number of revolution as the
nal gear front carrier E
Rear planetary gear
Condition Output Fixed Input
F

Acceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the G
Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear H
Condition Input Output Fixed
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution —
Same number of revolution as the I
Number of revolutions Deceleration from mid sun gear —
rear sun gear
TRANSMISSION : Component Description INFOID:0000000006363012

J
Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function

K
Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier.
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the mid internal gear and the rear carrier.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear. L
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
M
2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear.
Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC) N
rotation.
Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse ro-
2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC)
tation.
O
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and
Oil pump
each lubricating system.
P
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000006363013
The A/T fluid temperature is controlled to an appropriate level by the A/T fluid cooler.
AT-383
A/T FLUID COOLER SCHEMATIC
JSDIA1848GB
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A/T fluid cooler (water-cooling type)
• A/T fluid cooler (water-cooling type) is mounted at the lower part of the radiator.
• ATF flowing in the A/T fluid cooler (water-cooling type) is cooled by the engine coolant cooled by the radiator.
A/T fluid cooler (air-cooling type)
• A/T fluid cooler (air-cooling type) is installed in the front of radiator and condenser.
• A/T fluid cooler is provided with a bypass valve that controls ATF flow. Bypass valve operates by thermo wax
and a return spring. Bypass valve fully opens when A/T fluid temperature is approximately 50°C (122°F) and
fully closes when A/T fluid temperature is approximately 60°C (140°F).
• When A/T fluid temperature is low, the bypass valve is open. Most of ATF therefore returns to the transmis-
sion without flowing into the cooler core that has larger flow resistance.
JSDIA1846GB
AT-384
• When A/T fluid temperature rises [to approximately 60°C (140°F)], bypass valve closes and allows ATF to
flow into cooler core. ATF flowing into cooler core is cooled by air stream caused by vehicle travel and A
returned to transmission.
AT
JSDIA1847GB
F
AT-385
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000006363014
JSDIA1891GB
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000006363015
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor (or signal) TCM function Actuator

Transmission range switch Line pressure control (AT-390) Input clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal Shift change control (AT-393) Direct clutch solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal Shift pattern control (AT-397) Front brake solenoid valve
Wide open throttle position signal Lock-up control (AT-399) High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Engine speed signal Fail-safe control (AT-416) Low brake solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor ⇒ Self-diagnosis (AT-403) ⇒ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Output speed sensor CONSULT communication line (AT-403) Line pressure solenoid valve
Vehicle speed signal CAN communication line (AT-443) Anti-interlock solenoid valve
Manual mode switch signal 2346 brake solenoid valve
Stop lamp switch signal A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Side G sensor signal Back-up lamp relay
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Starter relay
G sensor signal
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-
mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc.
• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.
AT-386
SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000006363016
A
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd fail-
safe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged. B
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to AT-431, "Diagnosis AT
Flow".
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to D
1st Fail-Safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd Fail-Safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
E
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final Fail-Safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
F
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail- G
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
• Fixed in the “D” position • Fixed in the “D” position H
(The shifting can be per- (The shifting can be per-
formed) formed)
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited I
• The shifting between the • The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can
P0705 — be performed — be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
J
• Shift position indicator is • Shift position indicator is
switched OFF switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched • Starter relay is switched K
OFF (starter is disabled) OFF (starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock
• The shifting between the L
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be • The shifting between the
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
performed gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0710 • Manual mode is prohibited performed M
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the N
P0717 • Manual mode is prohibited performed
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited O
—
AT-387
SYSTEM
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
safe safe safe
• Only downshift can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • A vehicle speed signal —
from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as • The shifting between the
an effective signal gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0720
performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • A vehicle speed signal
—
-7 from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as
an effective signal
Engine torque limit: Max Engine torque limit: Max
Small gear ratio difference —
150Nm 150Nm
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or
function be- • The shifting between the
4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
gears of 1 - 2 performed
• Neutral
- 3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
performed
P0729
P0731
P0732 • Locks in 1GR
P0733 Great gear • The shifting between the
P0734 ratio differ- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
P0735 ence formed
P1734 • Driving with the gear ratio • The shifting between the
between 1GR and 2GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
• Driving with the gear ratio performed
between 2GR and 3GR • The shifting between the
Other than gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be
the above performed
4GR,5GR or 6GR performed
• Fix the gear while driving • The shifting between the
• Manual mode is prohibited gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
• Neutral formed
performed
• Locks in 1GR
• Locks in 5GR, 6GR or • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
7GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be formed
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited performed • The shifting between the
• Neutral • Manual mode is prohibited gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
performed
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
P0740 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0744 — —
AT-388
SYSTEM
safe safe safe A
• Locks in 1GR
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be B
performed
P0750
P0775
P0795 • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR,
P2713 — 5GR, 6GR or 7GR —
performed AT
P2722 • Manual mode is prohibited
P2731
performed
P2807 D
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
can be performed
E
• Locks in 3GR
P0780 — • Manual mode is prohibited —
performed
• Neutral
• Manual mode is prohibited F
Idle neutral control is prohib- Idle neutral control is prohibit-
P1585 — —
ited ed
• Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera- G
tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is
prohibited prohibited prohibited
P1705 — • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator
H
pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib-
ited ited ited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR I
performed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the J
4GR,5GR, 6GR or 7GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P1730 — gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
• Neutral performed
formed
K
performed
P1815 — Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited L
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
U0300
performed performed M
• Manual mode is prohibited • Line pressure is set to the
U1000
maximum hydraulic pres-
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear at driving sure
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited N
P0720
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
P1721 O
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000006363017
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and P
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
AT-389
SYSTEM
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Control at malfunction Neutral
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
Normal return condition and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
Vehicle behavior
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL

Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.
• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
Malfunction detection condition and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL

Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic sub-
strate in TCM reaches the high temperature.
TCM electronic substrate temperature

• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
Malfunction detection condition
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000006363018
JSDIA1345GB
AT-390
SYSTEM
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000006363019
A
• When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is
transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres- B
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving
state.
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state. AT
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control D
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
E
G
PCIA0008E
Back-up Control (Engine Brake) H

When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.
I
K
PCIA0009E
During Shift Change

L
AT-391
SYSTEM
The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic cor-
responds to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
PCIA0010E
At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
PCIA0011E
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
AT-392
SYSTEM
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000006363020
AT
JSDIA1892GB
M
AT-393
SYSTEM
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000006363021
Input/Output Signal Chart

Item Signal TCM function Actuator
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed • High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
• Direct clutch solenoid
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature valve
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal position signal* • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Shift change control
ECM Closed throttle position signal* • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch so-
Engine and A/T integrated control signal lenoid valve
(Engine torque)* • Line pressure solenoid
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal* • Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
*: This signal is transmitted via communication line.
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.
PCIA0012E
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.
Shift Change System Diagram
PCIA0013E
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
BLIPPING CONTROL
This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution
according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.
• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.
AT-394
SYSTEM
- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression.
- When downshifting by the manual mode. A
AT
JSDIA0826GB
• TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the F
selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression.
• Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
• ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal.
G
Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression
JSDIA0815GB
Downshifting by the manual mode M
JSDIA0817GB
AT-395
SYSTEM
IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL (EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA)
Signal
Item Each sensor, switch and TCM function Actuator
TCM ⇒ ECM ECM ⇒ TCM
control unit ⇒ TCM
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
Output speed sensor Output shaft revolution
A/T fluid temperature
ATF temperature
sensor
Transmission range
switch
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal posi- N idle instruction
N idle instruction Idle neutral con- Low brake sole-
tion signal* signal (Standby sig-
ECM signal (Start signal)* trol noid valve
nal)*
Throttle position signal*
G sensor signal*
Stop lamp switch signal*
BCM
Turn indicator signal*
ABS actuator electric
Pressure sensor signal*
unit (control unit)
Combination meter Vehicle speed signal*
*: This signal is transmitted via communication line.
The TCM activates low brake solenoid valve and controls the low brake oil pressure to the low pressure level
if the driver does not intend to start the vehicle while the vehicle is being stopped in the “D” or “DS” position.
Therefore, the low brake is in the release (slip) status and the power transmission route of A/T is the same sta-
tus as the “N” position. This can decrease the engine load and improves the fuel economy because the drive
force of engine is not transmitted to the output shaft of A/T.
Idle Neutral Control Start Condition
Idle neutral control starts when all of the following conditions are satisfied. However, the control ends when
any one of the following conditions becomes insufficient during idle neutral control.
Driving location : Level road and gentle slope

Selector lever position : “D” and “DS” position
Vehicle speed : 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.0 / 8
Brake pedal : Depress
Engine speed : Idle speed
Turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp : OFF
NOTE:
The idle neutral control is terminated or prohibited when the TCM and ECM detect that the vehicle is in any of
the conditions as per the following.
• Engine cooling water temperature and A/T fluid temperature are below or above a prescribed temperature.
• A/T malfunction occurs.
• DTC is detected.
• Fail-safe mode activates.
• Idle neutral control is performed continuously for a certain period of time.
Idle Neutral Control Resume Condition
Idle neutral control can be resumed when its start condition is fulfilled after any of the following operations is
performed (unless a malfunction occurs in the vehicle).
• After driving at more than a prescribed speed.
• When idle neutral control start conditions are fulfilled for a certain period of time.
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
AT-396
SYSTEM
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000006363022
AT
K
JSDIA1893GB
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000006363023

L
It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various
situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly.
M
ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL)
Item Signal TCM function Actuator N
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
• High and low reverse
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid O
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
valve
Engine speed signal* • Input clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal* P
ASC (Adaptive shift • 2346 brake solenoid valve
ECM Closed throttle position signal* control) • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch so-
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
lenoid valve
(engine torque)*
• Line pressure solenoid
ABS actuator and electric unit valve
Side G sensor signal*
(control unit) • Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
AT-397
SYSTEM
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
• When driving on an up/down slope
ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum
driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine
brake.
• When driving on a curve
TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR,
5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This
prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.
JSDIA1362GB
DS Mode
• Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active.
• DS mode can be switched according to the following method.
- When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switch-
ing to DS mode.
- When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main shift gate enables to cancel DS mode.
MANUAL MODE
Item Signal TCM function Actuator
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
• High and low reverse clutch
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature solenoid valve
Engine speed signal* • Direct clutch solenoid valve
ECM Accelerator pedal position sig- • Low brake solenoid valve
nal* Manual mode • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Manual mode signal* • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch sole-
Non-manual mode signal* noid valve
Combination meter
Manual mode shift up signal* • Line pressure solenoid valve
Manual mode shift down signal*
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
• The TCM receives the manual mode signal, non-manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal and
manual mode shift down signal from combination meter via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift
pattern control to the manual mode based on these signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each sole-
noid valve according to the shift operation of the driver.
• The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to
AT-416, "Fail-Safe".
LOCK-UP CONTROL
AT-398
SYSTEM
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000006363024
AT
JSDIA1350GB F
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000006363025

G
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. H
• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or
releases the torque converter clutch piston.
I
JSDIA0847GB L
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2
M
Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × ×
N
Lock-up released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained. O
in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the P
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up Control
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
AT-399
SYSTEM
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000006363026
The selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” position unless the
brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is set to ON. The
shift lock is unlocked by turning the shift lock solenoid ON when the
ignition switch is set to ON, the park position switch is turned ON
(selector lever is in “P” position), and the stop lamp switch is turned
ON (brake pedal is depressed) as shown in the operation chart in the
figure. Therefore, the shift lock solenoid receives no ON signal and
the shift lock remains locked if all of the above conditions are not ful-
filled. (However, selector operation is allowed if the shift lock release
button is pressed.)
JPDIA0624GB
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION

When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Selector Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned OFF (not energized) and the
solenoid rod (B) is extended with the spring when the brake pedal is
not depressed (no selector operation allowed) with the ignition
switch ON.
The connecting lock lever (C) is located at the position shown in the
figure when the solenoid rod is extended. It prevents the movement
of the detent rod (D). For these reasons, the selector lever cannot be
shifted from the “P” position.
JPDIA1165ZZ
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed)
AT-400
SYSTEM
The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned ON (energized) when the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON. The solenoid rod (B) A
is compressed by the electromagnetic force. The connecting lock
lever (C) rotates when the solenoid is activated. Therefore, the
detent rod (D) can be moved. For these reasons, the selector lever
B
can be shifted to other positions.
AT
JPDIA1166ZZ
D
“P” POSITION HOLD MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)
The shift lock solenoid (A) is not energized when the ignition switch
is in any position other than ON. In this condition, the shift mecha-
nism is locked and “P” position is held. The operation cannot be per- E
formed from “P” position if the brake pedal is depressed with the
ignition switch ON when the operation system of shift lock solenoid is
malfunctioning. However, the lock lever (B) is forcibly rotated and the F
shift lock is released when the shift lock release button (C) is
pressed from above. Then the selector operation from “P” position
can be performed.
G
D : Detent rod
JPDIA1167ZZ
CAUTION:
Use the shift lock release button only when the selector lever cannot be operated even if the brake H
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON.
KEY LOCK SYSTEM
I
KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000006363027
The key cannot be set to LOCK when the selector lever is not selected to “P” position. This prevents the key J
from being removed from the key cylinder.
KEY LOCK STATUS
The slider (B) in the key cylinder (A) is moved to the left side of the K
figure when the selector lever is in any positions other than “P” posi-
tion. The rotator (D) that rotates together with the key (C) cannot be
rotated for this reason. The key cannot be removed from the key cyl-
inder because it cannot be turned to LOCK (E). L
JSDIA1154ZZ N
KEY UNLOCK STATUS
The slider (B) in the key cylinder (A) is moved to the right side of the
figure when the selector lever is in “P” position and the finger is O
removed from the selector button. The rotator (C) can be rotated for
this reason. The key (D) can be removed from key cylinder because
it can be turned to LOCK (E). P
JSDIA1155ZZ
AT-401
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000006363028
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with
the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MI (malfunction indicator) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM mem-
ory and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to AT-421,
"DTC Index".
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the A/T system.
One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is
sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part.
The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MI (malfunction indicator) on the instru-
ment panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MI automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-1262, "Diagnosis Description".
AT-402
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000006363029
CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS B
Diagnostic test mode Function

Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. AT
Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
D
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnostic Support
It monitors the status of CAN communication.
Monitor
E
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engine, more prac- F
Function Test*
tical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
Special Function* Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed.
*: Although “Function Test” and “Special Function” are selectable, do not use its. G
WORK SUPPORT
H
Item name Description
G SENSOR CALIBRATION Calibrates G sensor.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS I
Refer to AT-421, "DTC Index".
IGN Counter
J
The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD) and indicates the number of times that the ignition
switch is turned ON after returning to the normal state from DTC.
• CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. K
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. L
• Other than CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON. M
- The number is fixed to255 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255.
DATA MONITOR
N
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
SELEC- O
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the P
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X
TCM from the output shaft revolution.
Displays the vehicle speed signal received via
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X —
CAN communication.
Displays the output speed calculated from the
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
pulse signal of output speed sensor.
AT-403
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the input speed calculated from front
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X
sun gear revolution and front carrier revolution.
Displays the front sun gear revolution calculat-
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — — ed from the pulse signal of input speed sensor
1.
Displays the front carrier gear revolution calcu-
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — lated from the pulse signal of input speed sen-
sor 2.
Displays the engine speed received via CAN
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
communication.
Displays the revolution difference between in-
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
put speed and engine speed.
Displays the accelerator position estimated val-
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X —
ue received via CAN communication.
Displays the throttle position received via CAN
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
communication.
Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calcu-
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X lated from the signal voltage of A/T fluid tem-
perature sensor.
Displays the ATF temperature estimated value
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X of torque converter outlet calculated from the
signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid temper-
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — —
ature sensor.
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM.

Displays the command current from TCM to the
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
line pressure solenoid.
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
torque converter clutch solenoid.
L/B SOLENOID (A) — X
low brake solenoid.
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
front brake solenoid.
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
high and low reverse clutch solenoid.
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
input clutch solenoid.
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
direct clutch solenoid.
2346/B SOL (A) — X
2346 brake solenoid.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
L/P SOL MON (A) — — line pressure solenoid, and displays the moni-
tor value.
TCC SOL MON (A) — — torque converter clutch solenoid, and displays
the monitor value.
L/B SOL MON (A) — — low brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
AT-404
A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
FR/B SOL MON (A) — — front brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
AT
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and dis-
plays the monitor value.
D
I/C SOL MON (A) — — input clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the E
D/C SOL MON (A) — — direct clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the F
2346/B SOL MON (A) — — 2346 brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Displays the gear ratio calculated from input G
GEAR RATIO — X
speed and output speed.
Displays the engine torque estimated value re-
ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — —
ceived via CAN communication.
H
Displays the engine torque estimated value re-
ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — — flected the requested torque of each control
unit received via CAN communication.
I
Displays the input torque using for the oil pres-
INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — — sure calculation process of shift change con-
trol.
Displays the input torque using for the oil pres- J
INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — — sure calculation process of line pressure con-
trol.
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque K
2 converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm or psi) — —
the oil pressure calculation process of lock-up
control.
L
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque
converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
the oil pressure calculation process of shift
change control. M
Displays the target oil pressure value of low
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
sure calculation process of shift change con-
N
trol.
Displays the target oil pressure value of front
2 brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm or psi) — — O
trol.
Displays the target oil pressure value of high
and low reverse clutch solenoid valve calculat- P
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
ed by the oil pressure calculation process of
shift change control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of input
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
trol.
AT-405
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the target oil pressure value of direct
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
trol.
Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
trol.
Displays the gear change data using the shift
SHIFT PATTERN — —
pattern control.
Displays the vehicle speed for control using the
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — —
control of TCM.
Displays the inclination angle calculated by the
G SEN SLOPE (%) X — G sensor signal received via CAN communica-
tion.
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 4.
range switch 3.
range switch 2.
range switch 1.
• Displays the operation status of paddle
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X — shifter (down switch).
• Not mounted but displayed.
• Displays the operation status of paddle
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X — shifter (up switch).
Displays the operation status of selector lever
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
(down switch).
Displays the operation status of selector lever
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
(up switch).
Displays whether the selector lever is in any
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
position other than manual shift gate position.
Displays whether the selector lever is in the
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
manual shift gate position.
• Displays the reception status of tow mode
TOW MODE SW (ON/OFF) — — signal received via CAN communication.
DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode.

• Displays the reception status of 1 position
switch signal received via CAN communica-
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
tion.
• Displays the reception status of overdrive
control switch signal received via CAN com-
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
munication.
AT-406
A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
Displays the reception status of stop lamp
BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X — switch signal received via CAN communica-
tion.
AT
• Displays the reception status of POWER
mode signal received via CAN communica-
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X —
tion.
• Not mounted but displayed. D
Displays the reception status of ASCD OD can-
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X — cel request signal received via CAN communi-
cation. E
Displays the reception status of ASCD opera-
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X —
tion signal received via CAN communication.
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X —

Displays the reception status of ABS operation F
signal received via CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X — request signal received via CAN communica- G
tion.
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) X — shift schedule change demand signal received
via CAN communication is “cold”. H
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) X — shift schedule change demand signal received
via CAN communication is “warm”. I
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of low brake. J
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
the related parts of high and low reversed
clutch, input clutch or front brake.
K
IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of input clutch or front brake. L
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
the related parts of high and low reversed M
clutch.
Displays the kickdown condition signal status
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
received via CAN communication.
N
Displays the idling status signal status received
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
via CAN communication.
Displays the judgment results of “driving” or O
DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — —
“coasting” judged by TCM.
Displays the transmission value of shift position
SHIFT IND SIGNAL — —
signal transmitted via CAN communication.
P
Displays the command status from TCM to
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — —
starter relay.
Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — — indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN com-
munication.
AT-407
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the transmission status of ATF tem-
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — — perature signal transmitted via CAN communi-
cation.
Displays the transmission status of manual
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — — mode signal transmitted via CAN communica-
tion.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the moni-
tor status.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — —
starter relay, and displays the monitor status.
Displays the command status from TCM to
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — —
anti-interlock solenoid.
SLCT LVR POSI — X Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM.

Displays the current transmission gear position
GEAR — X
recognized by TCM.
Displays the target gear position of gear
NEXT GR POSI — — change that is calculated based on the vehicle
speed information and throttle information.
Displays the transmission driving mode recog-
SHIFT MODE — —
nized by TCM.
D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of direct clutch.
FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of front brake.
2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of 2346 brake.
2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of 2346 brake or direct clutch.
Displays the control status of idle neutral con-
N IDLE STATUS (ON/OFF) — —
trol.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION
AT-408
Item Description Check item
A
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Input clutch solenoid B
valve
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Front brake solenoid
valve
Following items for “3GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Direct clutch solenoid AT
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) valve
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. D
• Low brake solenoid
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
valve
• 2346 brake solenoid
Following items for “5GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. valve
5TH GR FNCTN P0735 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Anti-interlock sole- E
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) noid valve
• Reverse brake
• Each clutch
6TH GR FNCTN P0729 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Hydraulic control cir-
F
cuit
7TH GR FNCTN P1734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) G
• Harness or connec-
tors
• Torque converter H
Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed. clutch solenoid valve
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Torque converter
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input speed sensor 1,
I
2
• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
J
AT-409
TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000006363030
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

NOTE:
1. The CONSULT electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT display. If the difference is notice-
able, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts
in accordance with the specified diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (that implies gear position) on CONSULT may slightly differ from that is described in Ser-
vice Manual. This occurs because of the reason as per the following:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance
- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start
- Gear position displayed on CONSULT indicates the point where shifts are completed
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
Approximately equals the speedome-
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
ter reading.
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
ter reading.
OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer / Gear ratio
Approximately equals the engine
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
speed.
Revolution of front sun gear is indicat-
F SUN GR REV During driving
ed.
F CARR GR REV During driving Revolution of front carrier is indicated.
Closely equals the tachometer read-
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
ing.
TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
THROTTLE POSI
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is in-
ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON
dicated.
Temperature of ATF at the exit of
ATF TEMP 2 Ignition switch ON
torque converter.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V)
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
TCC SOLENOID Lock-up is active 0.8 A
Other than the above 0A
Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
L/B SOLENOID
Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
AT-410
TCM
A
Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A B
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID AT
Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
D
2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346/B SOL
2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A E
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
TCC SOL MON Lock-up is active 0.8 A
F
Other than the above 0A
Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
L/B SOL MON
Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A G
Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
FR/B SOL MON
Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
H
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL MON
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A I
I/C SOL MON
Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
D/C SOL MON J
Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346/B SOL MON
2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
K
Driving with 1GR 4.887
Driving with 3GR 2.027 L
GEAR RATIO Driving with 4GR 1.412
M
Changes the value according to the ac- N
ENGINE TORQUE During driving
celeration or deceleration.
Changes the value according to the ac-
ENG TORQUE D During driving
celeration or deceleration. O
Changes the value according to the ac-
INPUT TRQ S During driving
Changes the value according to the ac- P
INPUT TRQ L/P During driving
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa
TRGT PRES L/P
Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa
Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa
TRGT PRES TCC Lock-up is active 600 kPa
Other than the above 0 kPa
AT-411
TCM
Low brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES L/B
Low brake is disengaged 0 kPa
Front brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES FR/B
Front brake is disengaged 0 kPa
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE HLR/C
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 kPa
Input clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES I/C
Input clutch is engaged 0 kPa
Direct clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES D/C
Direct clutch is engaged 0 kPa
2346 brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE 2346/B
2346 brake is disengaged 0 kPa
SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
ter reading.
Level road 0%
G SEN SLOPE Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%)
Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%)
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions OFF
RANGE SW 4
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions OFF
RANGE SW 3
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions OFF
RANGE SW 2
Selector lever in “P” position OFF
RANGE SW 1
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled to − side ON
SFT DWN ST SW*
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled to + side ON
SFT UP ST SW*
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
MANU MODE SW
Tow mode ON
TOW MODE SW*
Driving with DS mode ON
DS RANGE
Selector lever in “1” position ON
1 POSITION SW*
AT-412
TCM
A
When overdrive control switch is depressed ON
OD CONT SW*
When overdrive control switch is released OFF
Brake pedal is depressed ON B
BRAKESW
Brake pedal is released OFF
Power mode ON
POWERSHIFT SW* AT
When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON
ASCD-OD CUT
D
ASCD operate ON
ASCD-CRUISE
ABS operate ON E
ABS SIGNAL
When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON
TCS GR/P KEEP F
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change de-
ON
TCS SIGNAL 2 mand signal is “cold”
G
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change de-
ON
TCS SIGNAL 1 mand signal is “warm” H
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
LOW/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL I
HC/IC/FRB PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
J
IC/FRB PARTS
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL K
HLR/C PARTS
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed ON
W/O THL POS L
Accelerator pedal is released OFF
Accelerator pedal is released ON
CLSD THL POS
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed OFF M
Accelerator pedal is depressed DRIVE
DRV CST JUDGE
Accelerator pedal is released COAST
N
AT-413
TCM
When the selector lever is positioned in between each posi-
OFF
tion
Selector lever in “P” position P
Selector lever in “N” position N
Selector lever in “D” position
D
Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6
SHIFT IND SIGNAL Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3

Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR M1
Driving with DS mode DS
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
STARTER RELAY
For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON
F-SAFE IND/L
When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON
ATF WARN LAMP
Driving with manual mode ON
MANU MODE IND
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
ON OFF SOL MON Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
START RLY MON
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
ON OFF SOL Driving with 1GR to 3GR
AT-414
TCM
A
Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions B
D
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR
SLCT LVR POSI AT
D
GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th E
NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
Driving with the D position 0 or 3
SHIFT MODE F
Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8
At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL
D/C PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL G
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
FR/B PARTS
H
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
2346/B PARTS
At 2GR - 3GR - 4GR shift control FAIL I
2346B/DC PARTS
Idle neutral control is active ON
N IDLE STATUS J
*: Not mounted but always display as OFF.
TERMINAL LAYOUT K
N
SCIA1658E
PHYSICAL VALUES
O
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Value (Ap-
Condition
Input/ prox.) P
+ − Signal name
Output
Battery
1 Ignition switch ON
Ground Power supply Input voltage
(SB)
Ignition switch OFF 0V
2 Power supply Battery
Ground Input Always
(R) (Memory back-up) voltage
AT-415
TCM
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Value (Ap-
Condition
Input/ prox.)
+ − Signal name
Output
3 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
4 K-line (CONSULT Input/
— — —
(GR) signal) Output
5
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)
Battery
6 Ignition switch ON
Ground Power supply Input voltage
(Y)
Ignition switch OFF 0V
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V
7
Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON Battery
(LG) Selector lever in other positions.
voltage
8 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
Battery
9 Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions.
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON voltage
(BR)
Selector lever in other positions. 0V
10
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000006363031
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd fail-
safe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to AT-431, "Diagnosis
Flow".
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st Fail-Safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd Fail-Safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final Fail-Safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
AT-416
TCM
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail- A
safe safe safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
• Fixed in the “D” position • Fixed in the “D” position B
(The shifting can be per- (The shifting can be per-
formed) formed)
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited AT
gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can
P0705 — be performed — be performed
D
• Shift position indicator is • Shift position indicator is
switched OFF switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched • Starter relay is switched E
OFF (starter is disabled) OFF (starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock
• The shifting between the F
P0710 • Manual mode is prohibited performed G
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited
—
• The shifting between the H
P0717 • Manual mode is prohibited performed
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited I
—
• Only downshift can be per-
formed J
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • A vehicle speed signal —
from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as • The shifting between the K
an effective signal gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0720
performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited L
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • A vehicle speed signal
—
-7 from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as
an effective signal M
AT-417
TCM
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max Engine torque limit: Max
Small gear ratio difference —
150Nm 150Nm
• Locks in 1GR
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or
function be- • The shifting between the
4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
gears of 1 - 2 performed
• Neutral
- 3 and 7 • The shifting between the
performed
P0729
P0731
P0732 • Locks in 1GR
P0733 Great gear • The shifting between the
P0734 ratio differ- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
P0735 ence formed
P1734 • Driving with the gear ratio • The shifting between the
between 1GR and 2GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
• Driving with the gear ratio performed
between 2GR and 3GR • The shifting between the
Other than gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be
the above performed
4GR,5GR or 6GR performed
• Fix the gear while driving • The shifting between the
• Manual mode is prohibited gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
• Neutral formed
performed
• Locks in 1GR
• Locks in 5GR, 6GR or • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
7GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be formed
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited performed • The shifting between the
• Neutral • Manual mode is prohibited gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
performed
P0740 — —
P0744 — —
• Locks in 1GR
performed
P0750
P0775
P0795 • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR,
performed
P2713 — 5GR, 6GR or 7GR —
P2722 • Manual mode is prohibited
P2731
performed
P2807
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
can be performed
• Locks in 3GR
P0780 — • Manual mode is prohibited —
performed
• Neutral
AT-418
TCM
safe safe safe A
Idle neutral control is prohib- Idle neutral control is prohibit-
P1585 — —
ited ed
• Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera- B
tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is
prohibited prohibited prohibited
P1705 — • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator
pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib-
AT
ited ited ited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR D
performed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the E
4GR,5GR, 6GR or 7GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P1730 — gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
• Neutral performed
formed
F
performed
P1815 — Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited G
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
U0300
performed performed H
• Manual mode is prohibited • Line pressure is set to the
U1000
maximum hydraulic pres-
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear at driving sure
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited I
P0720
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
P1721 J
Protection Control INFOID:0000000006363032
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and K
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
L
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
M
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Control at malfunction Neutral
N
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
• The torque transmission cannot be performed O
Vehicle behavior
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL P

Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.
AT-419
TCM
• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
Malfunction detection condition and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL

Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic sub-
strate in TCM reaches the high temperature.
TCM electronic substrate temperature

• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
Malfunction detection condition
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000006363033
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the
following list.
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference

1 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-443
P0615 STARTER RELAY AT-444
P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A AT-446
P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A AT-447
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A AT-449
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AT-450
P0745 PC SOLENOID A AT-470
2
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A AT-471
P0775 PC SOLENOID B AT-472
P0795 PC SOLENOID C AT-475
P2713 PC SOLENOID D AT-489
P2722 PC SOLENOID E AT-490
P2731 PC SOLENOID F AT-491
P2807 PC SOLENOID G AT-492
AT-420
TCM
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference
A
P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO AT-456
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-458 B
3 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-464 AT
D
P0780 SHIFT AT-473
P1730 INTERLOCK AT-482
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-484 E
U0300 CAN COMM DATA AT-442
P0725 ENGINE SPEED AT-452
F
P1585 G SENSOR AT-476
4
P1705 TP SENSOR AT-479
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL AT-480 G
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH AT-486
DTC Index INFOID:0000000006363034

H
NOTE:
• If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per
the following list. Refer to AT-420, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". I
• The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD). Refer to AT-403, "CONSULT Function".
DTC*2 J
Items
Reference
(CONSULT screen terms) MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- CONSULT only “TRANS-
SULT or GST MISSION”
STARTER RELAY — P0615 AT-444 K
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 AT-447 L
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 AT-449
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 AT-450
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 AT-452 M
INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 AT-456
N
3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 AT-462 O
P
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 AT-471
PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 AT-472
SHIFT P0780 P0780 AT-473
AT-421
TCM
DTC*2
Items
Reference
(CONSULT screen terms) MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- CONSULT only “TRANS-
SULT or GST MISSION”
PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 AT-475
G SENSOR — P1585 AT-476
TP SENSOR — P1705 AT-479
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 AT-480
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-482
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 AT-486
PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 AT-489
PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 AT-490
PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 AT-491
PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 AT-492
CAN COMM DATA — U0300 AT-442
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-443
*1: Refer to AT-402, "Diagnosis Description".
AT-422
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000006363035
B
AT
JMCWA0075GB
AT-423
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
JMCWA0032GB
AT-424
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT
JMCWA0076GB
AT-425
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
JMCWA0077GB
AT-426
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT
JMCWA0078GB
AT-427
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
JMCWA0079GB
AT-428
A
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000006363036
AT
JMCWA0029GB
AT-429
JMCWA0030GB
AT-430
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000006363037
B
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

1. Refer to AT-432, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (con- AT
ditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings
in the vehicle.
2. Check the following:
D
- Service history
- Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electri-
cal Incident".
E
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC F
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data CONSULT and affix it to the Work Order G
Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information
described by the customer. AT-500, "Symptom Table" is effective. H
3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also.
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3. I
Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5.
3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM J
Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to AT-416, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to AT-432, "Question K
sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
tomer occurs. L
>> GO TO 5.
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM M
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.

Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to AT-416, "Fail-Safe".
N
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to AT-432, "Question
sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
tomer occurs. O
>> GO TO 6.
P
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to AT-420, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
Is any DTC detected?
AT-431
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
Use AT-500, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5.
YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Question sheet INFOID:0000000006363038
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop-
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. There-
fore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well
enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In
order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the
question sheet referring to the question points.
SEF907L
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
Question Sheet
Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date
Incident Date VIN
Model & Year In Service Date
Trans. Mileage Km / Mile
AT-432
Question Sheet
A
Symptoms Vehicle does not move ( Any position Particular position )
No up shift ( 1GR → 2GR 2GR → 3GR 3GR → 4GR 4GR → 5GR 5GR →
6GR 6GR → 7GR)
B
No down shift ( 7GR → 6GR 6GR → 5GR 5GR → 4GR 4GR → 3GR 3GR →
2GR 2GR → 1GR)
Lock-up malfunction
AT
Shift point too high or too low
Shift shock or slip
Noise or vibration D
No kick down
No pattern select
E
Others
Frequency All the time Under certain conditions Sometimes ( times a day) F
Weather conditions Not affected
Weather Fine Clouding Raining Snowing Other ( )
Temp. [Approx. °C (
G
Temp. Hot Warm Cool Cold
°F)]
Humidity High Middle Low
H
Transmission conditions Not affected
Cold During warm-up After warm-up
Engine speed ( rpm) I
Road conditions Not affected
In town In suburbs Freeway Off road (Up / Down)
J
Driving conditions Not affected
While cruis-
At starting While idling While engine racing At racing
ing
K
While accelerating While decelerating While turning (Right / Left)
Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)]
Other conditions L
AT-433
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
G sensor calibration must be performed when replacing transmission assembly.

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006363040
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

1. Park the vehicle on a flat road.
2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-6, "Tire".
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION
With CONSULT
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
2. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration.
Is “completed” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the calibration again.
3.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1585” detected?
YES >> Refer to AT-476, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Calibration end.
AT-434
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL VALVE & TCM
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL VALVE & TCM
A
G sensor calibration must be performed when replacing control valve & TCM. B
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE AT

D
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION E
With CONSULT
CAUTION: F
CAUTION: G
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC I
With CONSULT
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
YES >> Refer to AT-476, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
AT-435
G SENSOR CALIBRATION
G SENSOR CALIBRATION
G sensor calibration must be performed when the following operation is performed.

• Removal and installation or replacement of G sensor
• Replacement of transmission assembly
• Replacement of control valve & TCM
• Replacement of ECM
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT
YES >> Refer to AT-476, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AT-436
A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID
A
Changing INFOID:0000000006363045
B
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. AT
D
1. Step 1
a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
E
JSDIA1334ZZ
2. Step 2 H
I
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan and drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:
J
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole. K
CAUTION:
CAUTION: L
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF. M
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe and
temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
N
the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle. O
k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
l. Stop the engine.
3. Step 3 P
a. Repeat “Step 2”.
4. Final Step
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan and drain the ATF.
AT-437
A/T FLUID
d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to AT-517,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
charging pipe.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe and
temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.

the oil pan.
k. Start the engine.
l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP
1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT.
m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F) and remove the overflow plug from
the oil pan.
p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to AT-
517, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking
with CONSULT when the ATF level adjustment is performed.
1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor”
using CONSULT.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selec- JSDIA1334ZZ
tor lever in “P” position.
6. Lift up the vehicle.
AT-438
A/T FLUID
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. A
9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand. B
10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the AT
charging pipe.
11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF.
12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and D
the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF.
JSDIA1335ZZ
13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil
pan to the specified torque. Refer to AT-517, "Exploded View". E
CAUTION:
AT-439
STALL TEST
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000006363047
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.
5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, and quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
Stall speed : Refer to AT-610, "Stall Speed".

7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST

Possible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R”
• Low brake
H O • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
• Reverse brake
Stall speed O H • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage
AT-440
A/T POSITION
A/T POSITION
A
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000006363048
INSPECTION B
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. AT
3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown D
by the A/T position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly is shown in the figure. E
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking. F
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps does
not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position G
in the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” JSDIA0790GB
H
position, engine can be started even when selector lever is
moved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
I
10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be
indicated on the combination meter.
In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in J
the manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT
K
1. Loosen nut of control cable.
2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position.
3. Push control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 N L
(1kg, 2.2 lb), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten nut to
the specified torque. Refer to AT-512, "Exploded View".
M
N
SCIA6789E
AT-441
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
The amount of data transmitted from each control unit is read.

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006363050
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause

When the amount of data trans-
Internal Control Module Soft- mitted from each control unit is
U0300 Control units other than TCM.
ware Incompatibility smaller than the specified
amount.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Go to AT-442, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT

Check the number of control units replaced before detecting “U0300”.
Is the number of replaced control units one?
YES >> Since the replaced control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifica-
tions.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.INSPECTION CONTROL UNIT
With CONSULT
1. Remove one of the replaced control units.
2. Install the previous control unit mounted before replacement.
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch to check the other control units in the same method.
NO >> Since the removed control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifica-
tions.
AT-442
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission AT
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
TCM is not transmitting or re-
(CAN communication line is
U1000 CAN Communication Line ceiving CAN communication F
open or shorted.)
signal for 2 seconds or more.
• TCM
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. J
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
With GST K
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
YES >> Go to AT-443, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
Go to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
AT-443
P0615 STARTER RELAY
P0615 STARTER RELAY
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The starter monitor value is
(Starter relay and TCM circuit
P0615 Starter Relay Circuit OFF when the ignition switch is
is open or shorted.)
ON at the “P” and “N” positions.
• Starter relay circuit

1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions.
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL

2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground.
IPDM E/R connector

Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground Selector lever in “P” and

Battery voltage
“N” positions.
E17 48
Selector lever in other
0V
positions.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to SC-35, "Wiring Diagram - START -".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1)
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehi-
cle side harness connector terminal.
AT-444
P0615 STARTER RELAY
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F36 9 E17 48 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
AT
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
D
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
F51 9 Not existed E
YES >> GO TO 4.
F
4.CHECK JOINT CONNECTOR
1. Remove joint connector. Refer to AT-517, "Exploded View". G
2. Check the continuity between joint connector terminals.
A/T assembly harness connector side TCM harness connector side H

Continuity
Terminal Terminal
9 9 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 5.
J
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> Replace the control valve & TCM. Refer to AT-517, "Exploded View".
L
AT-445
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected if... Possible cause

The TCM detects an ON/OFF
combination pattern other than
that of the transmission range
(Transmission range switch-
switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. (For ON/
Transmission Range Switch A es 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit
P0705 OFF combination patterns of
Circuit (PRNDL Input) is open or shorted.)
transmission range switches,
• Transmission range switches
refer to AT-355, "A/T CON-
1, 2, 3 and 4
TROL SYSTEM : Transmission
Range Switch".)

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each
position for 2 seconds or more)
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

With GST

AT-446
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

• Harness or connectors AT
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is -40 °C (-40
(Sensor circuit is open.)
°F) or less continuously for 5 seconds while driving at 10
• A/T fluid temperature
km/h (7 MPH) or more.
sensor
D
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is 180 °C (356 (Sensor circuit is short.)
°F) or more continuously for 5 seconds. • A/T fluid temperature
sensor E
Transmission Fluid Tempera- TCM judges the following conditions while driving the ve-
P0710
ture Sensor A Circuit hicle at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more:
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by F
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 14 minutes when A/T fluid tem-
perature is -20 °C (-4 °F) or less.
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
• A/T fluid temperature
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 7 minutes when A/T fluid tem- G
sensor
perature is between -19 °C (-2 °F) and 0 °C (32 °F).
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 4 minutes when A/T fluid tem-
perature is between 1 °C (34 °F) and 20 °C (68 °F). H

CAUTION:
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
>> GO TO 2. K
With CONSULT L
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more.
M
SLCT LVR POSI :D
N
With GST
Is “P0710” detected? O
P

AT-447
AT-448
A

• Harness or connectors AT
The revolution of input speed
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A (Sensor circuit is open.)
P0717 sensor 1 and/or 2 is 270 rpm or
Circuit No Signal • Input speed sensor 1 and/or
less.
2
D
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. E
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. F
>> GO TO 2.
G
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. H
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “CLSD THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data
Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. I
CAUTION:
Keep the same gear position.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this J
test.
SLCT LVR POSI :D K

GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
CLSD THL POS : OFF L
ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm
With GST M
YES >> Go to AT-449, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
O
Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". P
AT-449
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• The vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor is
5 km/h (3MPH) or less when
the vehicle speed transmitted
from the combination meter
to TCM is 20 km/h (12 MPH)
or more. (Only when starts af-
ter the ignition switch is
turned ON.)
• The vehicle speed transmit-
ted from the combination • Harness or connectors
P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit meter to TCM does not de- (Sensor circuit is open.)
crease despite the 36 km/h • Output speed sensor
(23 MPH) or more of deceler-
ation in vehicle speed detect-
ed by the output speed
sensor. when the vehicle
speed detected by the output
speed sensor is 36 km/h (23
MPH) or more and the vehicle
speed transmitted from the
combination meter to TCM is
24 (15 MPH) or more.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

With GST

AT-450
YES >> GO TO 2. A
2.REPLACE OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND CHECK DTC
B
1. Replace output speed sensor. Refer to AT-530, "Exploded View".
2. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-450, "DTC Logic".
AT
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to AT-517, "Exploded View".
D
AT-451
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM via CAN communication line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• TCM does not receive the
CAN communication signal
from the ECM. Harness or connectors
P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit • The engine speed is more (ECM to TCM circuit is open or
less 150 rpm even if the vehi- shorted.)
cle speed is more than 10 km/
h (7 MPH).

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
SLCT LVR POSI :D

VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10km/h (7 MPH)
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM

With CONSULT
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-1288, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to AT-421, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
AT-452
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

YES >> Replace the control valve & TCM. Refer to AT-517, "Exploded View". B
AT
AT-453
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio • 0.915 or more
• 0.813 or less
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor

CAUTION:
• “AT-455, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT
1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
AT-454
GEAR : 6th A
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON- B
DITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in AT
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to AT-421,
"DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. D
Selector lever : “M” position

Gear position : 6th E
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
2. Check DTC. F
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729”
detected?
G
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to AT-455, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0729” is detected)>>Go to AT-455, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
Disassemble the A/T assembly to check component parts. Refer to AT-530, "Exploded View".
NOTE: L
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to AT-454,
"DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal? M
N
AT-455
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
• TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear.

• The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The revolution of under drive
sun gear is 8,000 rpm or more.
NOTE:
P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio • Front brake solenoid valve
Not detected when in “P” or “N”
• Input speed sensor 2
position and during a shift to “P”
or “N” position.

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.

VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
With GST

NOTE:
"DTC Logic".
AT-456
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A
AT
AT-457
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
• 4.594 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
AT-458
GEAR : 1st A
CAUTION:
"DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 1st E
2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
NOTE: L
"DTC Logic".
N
AT-459
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
• 2.980 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
AT-460
GEAR : 2nd A
CAUTION:
"DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 2nd E
2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
NOTE: L
"DTC Logic".
N
AT-461
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
• 1.906 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
AT-462
GEAR : 3rd A
CAUTION:
"DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 3rd E
2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
Disassemble the A/T assembly to check component parts. Refer to AT-540, "Disassembly".
NOTE: L
"DTC Logic".
N
AT-463
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
• 1.328 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
AT-464
GEAR : 4th A
CAUTION:
"DTC Index".
With GST

2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
NOTE: L
"DTC Logic".
YES >> Replace the transmission case and control valve & TCM. Refer to AT-530, "Exploded View".
N
AT-465
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P0735 Gear 5 Incorrect Circuit • 1.060 or more
• 0.940 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
AT-466
GEAR : 5th A
CAUTION:
"DTC Index".
With GST

2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
NOTE: L
"DTC Logic".
N
AT-467
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The torque converter clutch so-
lenoid valve monitor value is 0.4
(Solenoid valve circuit is
Torque Converter Clutch Cir- A or less when the torque con-
P0740 open or shorted.)
cuit/Open verter clutch solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch sole-
command value is more than
noid valve
0.75 A.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd

AT-468
A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006363093 AT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

D
• Torque converter clutch sole- E
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit The lock-up is not performed in noid valve
P0744
Intermittent spite of within the lock-up area. • Torque converter
• Hydraulic control circuit F

CAUTION:
G
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at H
>> GO TO 2. I
With CONSULT J
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
NOTE: K
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
L
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more M
O
Disassemble the A/T assembly to check component parts. Refer to AT-540, "Disassembly". P
NOTE:
"DTC Logic".
AT-469
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The line pressure solenoid
valve monitor value is 0.4 A or
P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A less when the line pressure so-
open or shorted.)
lenoid valve command value is
• Line pressure solenoid valve
more than 0.75 A.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT”.

AT-470
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
A

• The anti-interlock solenoid AT
valve monitor value is ON
when the anti-interlock sole-
noid valve command value is • Harness or connectors
OFF. (Solenoid valve circuit is D
P0750 Shift Solenoid A
• The anti-interlock solenoid open or shorted.)
valve monitor value is OFF • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
when the anti-interlock sole-
E
noid valve command value is
ON.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING G
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in J
“TRANSMISSION”.
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more K

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
L
With GST M
O
Is the inspection result normal? P
AT-471
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The input clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B when the input clutch solenoid
open or shorted.)
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST

AT-472
P0780 SHIFT
P0780 SHIFT
A
The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve oper-
ation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006363102 AT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

D
• When shifting from 3GR to
4GR with the selector lever in E
“D” position, the gear ratio
does not shift to 1.412 (gear • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
P0780 Shift Error ratio of 4th). • Low brake solenoid valve
• When shifting from 5GR to • Hydraulic control circuit F
6GR or 6GR to 7GR, the en-
gine speed exceeds the pre-
scribed speed.
G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
>> GO TO 2.
J
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. K
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
L
SLCT LVR POSI :D
GEAR : 3rd → 4th
M
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT”. N
NO >> INSPECTION END O
1.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM P

NOTE:
"DTC Logic".
AT-473
P0780 SHIFT
AT-474
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
A

The front brake solenoid valve AT
P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C when the front brake solenoid
open or shorted.)
• Front brake solenoid valve D
than 0.75 A.

CAUTION: E
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at F
>> GO TO 2. G

With CONSULT H
“TRANSMISSION”. I

MANU MODE SW : ON
J
GEAR : 7th
K
With GST
L
M
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N

O
AT-475
P1585 G SENSOR
P1585 G SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• The output voltage value of G
sensor is outside the stan-
dard for the specified period
of time caused by open cir- • G sensor
cuit, short circuit, or malfunc- • Harness or connector
P1585 G Sensor Circuit
tion of G sensor. (Sensor circuit is open or
• The movable gauging com- shorted.)
ponent of G sensor is stuck
for the specified period of
time during driving.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate side.
4. Start up in M1, and then upshift M2.
5. Accelerate the vehicle speed regularly from approximately 20 km/h (13 MPH) to approximately 50 km/h
(31 MPH) for 8 seconds in M2.
1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL

3. Select “G SEN SLOPE” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Swing the vehicle body and check that the value varies between −40.45 – 40.45%.
Monitor item Condition Status

Level road 0%
G SEN SLOPE Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%)
Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%)
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 1)
AT-476
P1585 G SENSOR
2. Touch “Erase”. A
3. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to AT-436, "Special Repair Requirement".
Is the inspection result normal? B
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical
Incident".
AT
3. CHECK G SENSOR POWER
2. Disconnect G sensor connector. D
4. Check voltage between G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
E
G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)
B46 3 5V F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 8. G
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect ECM connectors.
3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and G sensor vehicle side har-
ness connector terminals.
I
ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
J
76 1
E207 B46 Existed
77 2
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 2) L
Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
M
ECM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
76 N
E207 Not existed
77
YES >> GO TO 6. O
6.CHECK G SENSOR P
1. Remove G sensor. Refer to AT-516, "Exploded View".
2. Reconnect all the connectors.
AT-477
P1585 G SENSOR
4. Check voltage between ECM connector terminal and ground.
: Direction of gravitational force
ECM connector
Connector Terminal
Ground Vertical (–1G) (A) 1.17 V
E207 76 Horizontal (B) 2.5 V
Vertical (1G) (C) 3.83 V
SCIA8343J

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace G sensor. Refer to AT-516, "Exploded View".
7.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 2)
1. Install G sensor. Refer to AT-516, "Exploded View".
3. Touch “Erase”.
4. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to AT-436, "Special Repair Requirement".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical
Incident".
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 1)
2. Disconnect ECM connectors.
3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and G sensor vehicle side har-
ness connector terminal.
ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
E207 54 B36 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 2)
Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
ECM vehicle side harness connector

Continuity
Terminal Connector Ground
E207 54 Not existed
YES >> Check ECM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-1325, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G sensor calibration must be performed when removing or replacing the G sensor.

Perform G sensor calibration.
>> Refer to AT-436, "Special Repair Requirement".
AT-478
P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
A

TCM detects the difference be- AT
Accelerator Pedal Position Sen- tween two accelerator pedal po-
P1705 (Sensor circuit is open or short-
sor Signal Circuit sition signals received from
ed.)
ECM via CAN communication.
D
1.PRECONDITIONING E
F
>> GO TO 2.
G
With CONSULT
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. H
SLCT LVR POSI :D

VHCL/S SE-A/T : 5 km/h (3 MPH) or more I
J
K
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM

With CONSULT L
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected? M
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-1288, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM N
With CONSULT
O
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to AT-421, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
P
AT-479
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM via CAN communication line. The sig-
nal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then
use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• The vehicle speed transmit-
ted from the combination
meter to TCM is 5 km/h
(3MPH) or less when the ve-
hicle speed detected by the
output speed sensor is 20
km/h (12 MPH) or more.
(Only when starts after the ig-
nition switch is turned ON.)
• The vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor Harness or connectors
P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit does not decrease despite (Sensor circuit is open or short-
the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or ed.)
more of deceleration in vehi-
cle speed received from the
combination meter when the
vehicle speed transmitted
from the combination meter
to TCM is 36 km/h (23 MPH)
or more and the vehicle
speed detected by the output
speed sensor is 24 (15 MPH)
or more.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “VHCL/S SE-AT” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”

AT-480
A
1.CHECK DTC OF COMBINATION METER
With CONSULT
B
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item.
AT
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT D
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to AT-421, "DTC Index". E
NO >> GO TO 3.
F
YES >> Replace the control valve & TCM. Refer to AT-517, "Exploded View". G
AT-481
P1730 INTERLOCK
P1730 INTERLOCK
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

(Solenoid valve circuit is open
or shorted.)
The output speed sensor de-
tects the deceleration of 12 km/
P1730 Interlock solenoid valve
h (7 MPH) or more for 1 sec-
ond.
• Each clutch
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, an input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is
not an input speed sensor malfunction.
CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle the following condition.
SLCT LVR POSI :D

GEAR : 1st through 7th
With GST
Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000006363116
Refer to AT-416, "Fail-Safe".
AT-482
P1730 INTERLOCK
A
NOTE: B
"DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal? AT
D
AT-483
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
• 0.729 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
AT-484
GEAR : 7th A
CAUTION:
"DTC Index".
With GST

2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
NOTE: L
"DTC Logic".
N
AT-485
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TCM monitors manual mode,
non manual mode, up or down • Harness or connectors
switch signal, and detects as ir- (These switches circuit is
P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit
regular when impossible input open or shorted.)
pattern occurs 2 second or • Manual mode switch
more.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 2 seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI :D

MANU MODE SW : ON
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector

Terminal Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
+ −
6
7
M79 9 Battery voltage
8
10
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
AT-486
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to AT-488, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)". A
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT)
AT
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity D
M79 9 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1) F
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and combination
meter vehicle side harness connector terminals. G
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Combination meter vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
6 43
7 46
M79 M22 Existed I
8 45
10 44
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER (PART 2) K
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
L
Continuity
Connector Terminal
6 M
Ground
7
M79 Not existed
8
10
N

YES >> GO TO 6. O
Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". P
YES >> GO TO 7.
1. Reconnect all the connectors.
AT-487
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW” and “AT SFT DWN SW” in “Data Monitor” in
“METER/M&A”.
4. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. Refer to DI-14, "CONSULT Function (METER/
M&A)".
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-27, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter".
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000006363123

Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
A/T shift selector connector

Connector Terminal
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Existed
6
Other than the above Not existed
Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed
7
M79 9
Selector lever is shifted to + side Existed
8
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Not existed
10
Other than the above Existed
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-510, "Exploded View".
AT-488
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
A

The high and low reverse clutch AT
solenoid valve monitor value is
0.4 A or less when the high and
P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D open or shorted.)
low reverse clutch solenoid
• High and low reverse clutch D
solenoid valve
than 0.75 A.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING F
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION H
With CONSULT
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in I
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more J

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 3rd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more K
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”. L
NO >> INSPECTION END M
N
Is the inspection result normal? O
P
AT-489
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The low brake solenoid valve
P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E when the low brake solenoid
open or shorted.)
than 0.75 A.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
“TRANSMISSION”.

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST

AT-490
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
A

The 2346 brake solenoid valve AT
P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F when the 2346 brake solenoid
open or shorted.)
• 2346 brake solenoid valve D
than 0.75 A.

CAUTION: E
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at F
>> GO TO 2. G

With CONSULT H
“TRANSMISSION”. I

MANU MODE SW : ON
J
GEAR : 2nd
K
With GST
L
M
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N

O
AT-491
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The direct clutch solenoid valve
P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G when the direct clutch solenoid
open or shorted.)
than 0.75 A.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
“TRANSMISSION”.

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST

AT-492
A
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 1) B

2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. AT

Connector Terminal Ground D
F36 2 Always Battery voltage
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 2) F
Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector G

Connector Terminal
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
1 Ground H
Turn ignition switch OFF 0V
F36
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
6
Turn ignition switch OFF 0V
I
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 7. J
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
K
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground L
5
F36 Existed
10
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK JOINT CONNECTOR N
1. Remove joint connector. Refer to AT-517, "Exploded View".

2. Check the continuity between joint connector terminals.
O
A/T assembly harness connector side TCM harness connector side
Continuity
Terminal Terminal
P
1 1
2 2
5 5 Existed
6 6
10 10
AT-493
YES >> GO TO 5.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
• Harness for short or open between battery positive terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connec-
tor terminal 2. Refer to PG-16, "V9X ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - POWER -".
• Battery
• 10A fuse (No.25, located in the fuse and fusible link box). Refer to PG-90, "Terminal Arrangement".
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical
Incident".
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 1)
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T assembly vehicle
side harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
1
E12 14 F36 Existed
6
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
1
F36 Not existed
6
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "V9X ENGINE MODELS :
Wiring Diagram - POWER -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse (No.59, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-33, "IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R (ignition relay)
Incident".
AT-494
A
TCM transmits a A/T position indicator signal and a manual mode indicator signal to combination meter. via B
CAN communication line. While the vehicle is running, combination meter displays a shift position on the com-
bination meter, according to these signals.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006363134 AT
1.CHECK A/T INDICATOR

CAUTION: D
2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the A/T indicator E
mutually coincide.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the A/
T indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side
(1GR ⇔ 7GR). F
NO >> Go to AT-495, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
H
With CONSULT
CAUTION: I
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
J
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR
POSI” mutually coincide. Refer to AT-410, "Reference Value".
4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
“SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− K
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to AT-410, "Reference Value".
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the A/T indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual mode switch.
Refer to AT-488, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)". M
• Check A/T main system. Refer to AT-416, "Fail-Safe".
- Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to AT-421, "DTC Index".
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the A/T indicator is not indicated.)>>•Perform “Self Diagnostic
Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to AT-421, "DTC Index". N
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the A/T indicator do not coincide.)>>•Perform “Self
Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to AT-421, "DTC Index".
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the A/T indicator)>>•Check the combina- O
tion meter. Refer to DI-12, "Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter".
AT-495
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006363136
1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1)

2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
NO >> Go to AT-496, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1. CHECK POWER SOURCE

2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
4. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector terminal and ground.
Fuse block (J/B) connector

Voltage (Approx.)
M88 2A Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check the following.
• 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-89, "Terminal Arrangement".
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-16, "V9X
ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - POWER -".
• Ignition switch
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
M88 2A E109 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
AT-496
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A

Continuity
E109 3 Not existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
AT
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to AT-498, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 10.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1) E

2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector
F
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
G
Terminal Terminal Continuity
Connector Connector
+ –
E109 4 M79 1 Existed H
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between control vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. J
Continuity
K
M79 1 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7. L
7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
M
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity N
M79 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH P
Check park position switch. Refer to AT-498, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
AT-497
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to AT-498, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)".
Incident".
10.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".
>> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to AT-498, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-6, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000006363138

Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch connector

Terminal
Depressed brake pedal Existed
3 4
Released brake pedal Not existed
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-6, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) INFOID:0000000006363139
1.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH

Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
A/T shift selector connector

Terminal
Selector lever in “P” position. Existed
1 2
Other than the above. Not existed
NO >> Replace A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to AT-510, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000006363140
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

Apply voltage to A/T shift selector connector terminals and check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
AT-498
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T shift selector connector A

Terminal Condition Status
+ (fuse) –
• Selector lever in “P” position.
B
1 2 • Apply 12 V direct current between Shift lock solenoid operates
terminals 1 and 2.
Is the inspection result normal? AT
NO >> Replace A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to AT-510, "Exploded View".
D
AT-499
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000006363141
• The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
• Perform diagnoses of symptom table 1 before symptom table 2.
SYMPTOM TABLE 1
Diagnostic item
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve

Accelerator pedal position sensor
Torque converter solenoid valve

A/T fluid temperature sensor
Anti-interlock solenoid valve

2346 brake solenoid valve

Low brake solenoid valve
Output speed sensor
CAN communication
Manual mode switch
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom
Stop lamp switch

Battery voltage
Control cable
Starter relay
AT-441
AT-450
AT-480
AT-479
AT-452
AT-449
AT-447
AT-493
AT-446
AT-486
AT-498
AT-470
AT-468
AT-490
AT-475
AT-489
AT-472
AT-492
AT-491
AT-471
AT-444
AT-443
Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3
Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2
→ “D” position 4 7 6 6 5 3 2 3 1
→ “R” position 4 7 6 6 5 3 2 1
1GR ⇔ 2GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 1
2GR ⇔ 3GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 1
3GR ⇔ 4GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1
Driving 4GR ⇔ 5GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1

perfor- When
Large 5GR ⇔ 6GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1
mance shifting
shock
Poor gears 6GR ⇔ 7GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1
perfor- Downshift when
mance accelerator ped- 3 2 4 3 3 1
al is depressed
Upshift when ac-
celerator pedal 3 2 4 3 3 1
is released
Lock-up 4 2 4 4 4 3 1
Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3
In “R” position 2 1
In “N” position 2 1
Strange noise
In “D” position 2 1
Engine at idle 2 1
AT-500
tion
Func-
trouble
Gear
change
does no
tion
“M” posi-
“D” position
Symptom
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 7GR
5GR → 6GR
4GR → 5GR
3GR → 4GR
2GR → 3GR
1GR → 2GR
6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
Locks in 7GR
Locks in 6GR
Locks in 5GR
Locks in 4GR
Locks in 3GR
Locks in 2GR
Locks in 1GR
Does not lock-up

AT-441 Control cable
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
AT-450 Output speed sensor
AT-480 Vehicle speed signal
AT-479 Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-501
AT-452 Engine speed signal
AT-449 Input speed sensor
3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
2 2
AT-447 A/T fluid temperature sensor
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
1
AT-493 Battery voltage
2 2 2 4 5
1
1
AT-446 Transmission range switch
3 2
3 2
3 2
3 2
3 2
3 2
AT-486 Manual mode switch
AT-498 Stop lamp switch
AT-470 Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-468 Torque converter solenoid valve
Diagnostic item
1
AT-490 Low brake solenoid valve
1
AT-475 Front brake solenoid valve
1
AT-489 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
1
1
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
1
AT-472 Input clutch solenoid valve
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1
1
1
1
1
AT-492 Direct clutch solenoid valve

1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
1
1
AT-491 2346 brake solenoid valve
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
1
AT-471 Anti-interlock solenoid valve

AT-444 Starter relay
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
[7AT: RE7R01B]
AT-443 CAN communication

I
L
AT
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
D
O
G
M
ble
Func-
tion trou-
Poor
shifting
not
Slip
work
does
brake
Engine
Symptom
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
tion
sition
gears
When
shifting
“M” po-
2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 5GR
7GR → 6GR
6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
“D” position → “M” posi-

AT-441 Control cable
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3 AT-450 Output speed sensor
AT-480 Vehicle speed signal
AT-479 Accelerator pedal position sensor
AT-502
AT-452 Engine speed signal
AT-449 Input speed sensor
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4
AT-447 A/T fluid temperature sensor

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
AT-493 Battery voltage

AT-446 Transmission range switch
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2 AT-486 Manual mode switch
AT-498 Stop lamp switch
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
AT-470 Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-468 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Diagnostic item
3
2
AT-490 Low brake solenoid valve
3
3
3
2
AT-475 Front brake solenoid valve

3
3
3
2
AT-489 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve

3
2
AT-472 Input clutch solenoid valve

3
2
AT-492 Direct clutch solenoid valve

3
3
3 3
3
2
2 2
2
2
AT-491 2346 brake solenoid valve

3
2
AT-471 Anti-interlock solenoid valve

AT-444 Starter relay
[7AT: RE7R01B]
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AT-443 CAN communication

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item
A

B



AT
Output speed sensor
Manual mode switch

CAN communication
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom
Stop lamp switch

Battery voltage
Control cable
D
Starter relay
E
AT-441
AT-450
AT-480
AT-479
AT-452
AT-449
AT-447
AT-493
AT-446
AT-486
AT-498
AT-470
AT-468
AT-490
AT-475
AT-489
AT-472
AT-492
AT-491
AT-471
AT-444
AT-443
F
With selector
lever in “D”
position, ac- G
5 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 1
celeration is
extremely
poor.
With selector
H
lever in “R”
position, ac-
5 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 1
celeration is I
extremely
poor.
While starting
off by acceler- J
3 3 3 4 2 2 2 1
ating in 1GR,
engine races.
While acceler- K
ating in 2GR, 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 1
engine races.
Poor
Func- While acceler-
power L
tion trou- Slip ating in 3GR, 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 1
trans-
ble engine races.
mission
While acceler-
ating in 4GR, 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 1
M
engine races.
While acceler-
ating in 5GR, 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 1 N
engine races.
While acceler-
ating in 6GR, 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 1 O
engine races.
While acceler-
ating in 7GR, 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 1
engine races.
P
Lock-up 3 3 3 4 2 2 1
No creep at
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
all.
Extremely
1
large creep.
AT-503
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item





Output speed sensor
Manual mode switch
CAN communication
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom
Stop lamp switch

Battery voltage
Control cable
Starter relay
AT-441
AT-450
AT-480
AT-479
AT-452
AT-449
AT-447
AT-493
AT-446
AT-486
AT-498
AT-470
AT-468
AT-490
AT-475
AT-489
AT-472
AT-492
AT-491
AT-471
AT-444
AT-443
Vehicle cannot run in all
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
position.
Driving is not possible in
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
“D” position.
Driving is not possible in
3 2 1 1 1
“R” position.
Power transmis-
Engine stall 4 5 5 6 3 2 1
sion cannot be
performed Engine stalls when selec-
tor lever shifted “N” → “D” 4 5 5 3 2 1
or “R”.
Engine does not start in
3 1 2 1
“N” or “P” position.
Function Engine starts in position
3 2 1
trouble other than “N” or “P”.
Vehicle does not enter
1 2
parking condition.
Parking condition is not
1 2
cancelled.
1 2
“P” position.
Poor operation
Vehicle moves forward
1 2
with the “R” position.
1 2
“N” position.
Vehicle moves backward
1 2
with the “D” position.
SYMPTOM TABLE 2
AT-504
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item A
High and low reverse clutch

B
2nd one-way clutch
Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter
Reverse brake
control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake
Input clutch
Symptom
2346 brake
Low brake*
AT
Oil pump
gear
D
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-530
AT-604
AT-593
AT-607
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-599
AT-530
AT-517
AT-530
E
Shift point is high in “D” position.
Shift point is low in “D” position.
→ “D” position 1 2 2 F
→ “R” position 1 1 2
1GR ⇔ 2GR 1 2
G
2GR ⇔ 3GR 1 2
3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 1 2
Driving 4GR ⇔ 5GR 1 1 2
When H
perfor- Large
mance shifting 5GR ⇔ 6GR 1 1 2
shock
Poor gears
6GR ⇔ 7GR 1 1 2
perfor- I
mance Downshift when accel-
erator pedal is de- 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
pressed
Upshift when accelera- J
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
tor pedal is released
Lock-up 1 2
Judder Lock-up 1 2 K
In “R” position 1 1 1 1 2
In “N” position 1 1 1 2
Strange noise L
In “D” position 1 1 1 1 2
Engine at idle 1 1 1 2
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-359, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional M
View".
AT-505
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item
2nd one-way clutch
Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter
Reverse brake
control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake
Input clutch
Symptom
2346 brake
Low brake*
Oil pump
gear
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-530
AT-604
AT-593
AT-607
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-599
AT-530
AT-517
AT-530
Locks in 1GR 1 1 1 2
Locks in 2GR 1
Locks in 3GR 1
Locks in 4GR 1
Locks in 5GR 1
Locks in 6GR 1
Locks in 7GR 1
1GR → 2GR 1 1 1 2
“D” posi- 2GR → 3GR 1 2

tion 3GR → 4GR 2 1 1 1 2
4GR → 5GR 1 1 2
Func- Gear 5GR → 6GR 1 2
tion does no
trouble change 6GR → 7GR 2 1 1 1 2
5GR → 4GR 1 2
4GR → 3GR 2 1 2
3GR → 2GR 1 1 2
2GR → 1GR 1 1 1 2
Does not lock-up 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1GR ⇔ 2GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
“M” posi- 3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

tion 4GR ⇔ 5GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-359, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional
View".
AT-506
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item A

B
2nd one-way clutch
Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter
Reverse brake
control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake
Input clutch
Symptom
2346 brake
Low brake*
AT
Oil pump
gear
D
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-530
AT-604
AT-593
AT-607
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-599
AT-530
AT-517
AT-530
E
1GR ⇔ 2GR 1 1 1 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 1 1 2
When 3GR ⇔ 4GR 1 2 1 2 F
Slip shifting
gears 4GR ⇔ 5GR 1 1 1 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 1 1 1 2
G
6GR ⇔ 7GR 1 1 1 2
Func- Poor
tion shift- “D” position → “M” position 1 1 1 1 1 2
trouble ing
7GR → 6GR 1 1 1 2 H
En-
6GR → 5GR 1 1 1 2
gine
brake “M” posi- 5GR → 4GR 1 1 1 2
does tion I
4GR → 3GR 1 2 1 2
not
work 3GR → 2GR 1 1 1 1 1 2
2GR → 1GR 1 1 1 1 2
J
AT-507
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item
2nd one-way clutch
Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter
Reverse brake
control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake
Input clutch
Symptom
Low brake*
2346 brake
Oil pump
gear
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-530
AT-604
AT-593
AT-607
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-599
AT-530
AT-517
AT-530
With selector lever
in “D” position, ac-
1 1 2 1 1 2
celeration is ex-
tremely poor.
With selector lever
in “R” position, ac-
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
celeration is ex-
tremely poor.
While starting off
by accelerating in
1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1GR, engine rac-
es.
While accelerating
in 2GR, engine 1 2 1 1 1 2
races.
Poor While accelerating
pow- in 3GR, engine 1 2 1 1 1 2
Func-
er races.
tion Slip
trans-
trouble While accelerating
mis-
sion in 4GR, engine 1 1 1 1 1 2
races.
While accelerating
in 5GR, engine 1 1 1 1 1 2
races.
While accelerating
in 6GR, engine 1 1 1 1 1 2
races.
While accelerating
in 7GR, engine 1 1 1 1 2
races.
Lock-up 1 1 1 2
No creep at all. 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Extremely large
1
creep.
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-359, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional
View".
AT-508
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item A

B
2nd one-way clutch
Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter
Reverse brake
control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake
Input clutch
Symptom
2346 brake
Low brake*
AT
Oil pump
gear
D
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-530
AT-604
AT-593
AT-607
AT-581
AT-530
AT-530
AT-599
AT-530
AT-517
AT-530
E
Vehicle cannot run in all position. 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Driving is not possible in “D” posi-
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
tion.
F
Driving is not possible in “R” posi-
1 1 1 1 1 2 1
tion.
Power trans-
Engine stall 1
mission cannot G
be performed Engine stalls when selector lever
1
shifted “N” → “D” or “R”.
Engine does not start in “N” or “P” H
1
position.
Engine starts in position other
Function
than “N” or “P”.
trouble I
Vehicle does not enter parking
1
condition.
Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 J
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” posi-
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
tion.
Poor operation Vehicle moves forward with the
2 1 1 1 1 1 2 K
“R” position.
Vehicle runs with A/T in “N” posi-
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
tion.
L
Vehicle moves backward with the
1 2
“D” position.
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-359, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional M
View".
AT-509
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B]

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006363142
SCIA6979E
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover

4. A/T shift selector harness connector 5. Lock plate 6. Control cable
7. Key interlock cable 8. Shift lock solenoid and park position 9. A/T shift selector assembly
switch assembly
10. Slide plate 11. Position lamp 12. Position indicator plate
REMOVAL
AT-510
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
1. Remove knob cover below selector lever downward.
2. Pull lock pin out of selector lever knob. A
3. Remove selector lever knob and knob cover.
4. Remove center console. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installa-
tion". B
AT
SCIA6898E
D
5. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector.
6. Disconnect key interlock cable from A/T shift selector assembly.
Refer to AT-514, "Removal and Installation". E
7. Remove lock plate from control cable.
8. Disconnect control cable from A/T shift selector assembly.
F
G
JSDIA1628GB
9. Remove A/T shift selector assembly. H
SCIA6899E
K
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
L
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

M
Check the A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to AT-441, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust the A/T position. Refer to AT-441, "Inspection and Adjustment". N
AT-511
CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
JSDIA1834GB
1. Control cable 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. Lock plate

4. Manual lever 5. Washer 6. Lock plate
7. Bracket 8. A/T assembly
A. Retainer
Refer to GI-9, "Component" for symbols in the figure.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect control cable from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to AT-510, "Removal and Installation".
AT-512
CONTROL CABLE
2. Remove control cable from manual lever.
3. Remove lock plate from control cable. A
4. Remove control cable from bracket.
5. Remove bracket from A/T assembly.
B
6. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
AT
SCIA6784E
D
7. Remove control cable from floor panel.
G
SCIA6785E
INSTALLATION H
Install in the reverse order of removal.
I
Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to AT-441, "Inspection and Adjustment".
J
Adjust A/T position. Refer to AT-441, "Inspection and Adjustment".
K
AT-513
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
JSDIA1861ZZ
1. Key interlock cable 2. A/T shift selector assembly

A. Key cylinder
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove lower instrument panel LH (LHD models) or lower instrument panel RH (RHD models). Refer to
IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
4. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster
holder.
5. Remove casing cap from bracket of A/T shift selector assembly
and remove interlock rod from adjuster holder.
SCIA6793E
AT-514
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
6. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock
cable. A
AT
SCIA6900E
D
INSTALLATION
Note the following and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interfer- E
ence with adjacent parts.
• Refer to the following when installing the key interlock cable.
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. F
2. Turn ignition key to “lock” position.
3. Set selector lever to “P” position.
G
SCIA6900E I
4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.

5. Install casing cap to bracket. J
6. Move slider in order to secure adjuster holder to interlock rod.
CAUTION:
Never touch any other areas than slider or apply any force K
to slider except in the sliding direction.
SCIA1232E

M

After installing key interlock cable to A/T shift selector, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly N
secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb),
replace key interlock cable with new one.
O
AT-515
G SENSOR
G SENSOR
JPDIA1162GB
1. G sensor 2. Bracket
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Perform G sensor calibration when removing or replacing G sensor. Refer to AT-434, "Description".
• Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact.
• Never use power tool to avoid impact.
CAUTION:
• Perform G sensor calibration when removing or replacing G sensor. Refer to AT-434, "Description".
• Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact.
• Never use power tool to avoid impact.
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect G sensor connector.
3. Remove G sensor from bracket.
4. Remove bracket from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Install bracket with care of correct installation direction.

Perform G sensor calibration. Refer to AT-436, "Special Repair Requirement".
AT-516
CONTROL VALVE & TCM
CONTROL VALVE & TCM
A
AT
JSDIA1872GB
N
1. A/T 2. Snap ring 3. Control valve & TCM
4. Oil pan gasket 5. Oil pan 6. Overflow plug
7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Oil pan mounting bolt O
10. Magnet 11. Clip 12. Joint connector
P
REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
AT-517
CONTROL VALVE & TCM
2. Remove oil pan (1) and oil pan gasket.
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JPDIA1073ZZ
3. Remove magnets (1) from oil pan.
JPDIA0009ZZ
4. Remove snap ring (1) from joint connector (2).
JSDIA1756ZZ
5. Push joint connector (1).
JSDIA1757ZZ
6. Disconnect output speed sensor connector (A).

CAUTION:
7. Disengage terminal clip ( ).
JPDIA1104ZZ
AT-518
CONTROL VALVE & TCM
8. Remove bolts and clip (1) from the control valve & TCM.
A
: Vehicle front
B
A 43 (1.69) 3
B 40 (1.57) 2 AT
C 54 (2.13) 6
D 50 (1.97) 2 JPDIA1105ZZ
E* 50 (1.97) 1 D
*: Reamer bolt
9. Remove the control valve & TCM from transmission case. E
CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve (1) notch
and manual plate (2) height. Remove it vertically.
F
JPDIA0012ZZ
H
10. Remove joint connector (1) from the control valve & TCM using
a flat-bladed screwdriver (A).
I
K
JSDIA1718ZZ
11. Disconnect TCM connector (A). L

CAUTION:
M
JSDIA1813ZZ
O
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. P
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage connector when installing any connector.
• Never reuse joint connector.
• Apply ATF to O-ring of joint connector.
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gas-
ket after adjustment of A/T fluid filling.
• Refer to the following when installing the control valve & TCM to transmission case.
AT-519
CONTROL VALVE & TCM
CAUTION:
• Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
input speed sensor holes (A).
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outside so
as not to disturb installation of the control valve & TCM.
• Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of the control valve
& TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
JPDIA1106ZZ
• Assemble it so that manual valve (1) cutout is engaged with

manual plate (2) projection.
JPDIA0012ZZ
- Install bolts and clip (1) to the control valve & TCM. Tighten bolt (E)
to the specified torque before tightening the other than bolts.
: Vehicle front

A 43 (1.69) 3
B 40 (1.57) 2
C 54 (2.13) 6
JPDIA1105ZZ
D 50 (1.97) 2
E* 50 (1.97) 1
*: Reamer bolt
• Refer to the following when installing oil pan to transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the
magnet, and then assembly.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transmission case and oil pan.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
- Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the
numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening
them.
: Vehicle front
JPDIA1074ZZ
AT-520
CONTROL VALVE & TCM
A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign B
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can AT
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of
A/T. Refer to CO-70, "Exploded View".
D
SCIA5199E
E
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION F
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-438, "Adjustment".
AT-521
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
JPDIA1160ZZ
1. Air breather tube 2. A/T assembly 3. A/T air breather hose

A. A/T air breather tube
B. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to AT-527, "Removal and Installation".
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear engine undercover.
2. Remove oxydation catalytic converter. Refer to EX-15, "WITHOUT DPF (DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER)
MODELS : Exploded View".
3. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-15, "WITHOUT DPF (DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER) MODELS
: Exploded View".
4. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and
overflow plug.
5. Remove front cross member. Refer to AT-527, "Exploded View".
6. Remove A/T cross member. Refer to AT-527, "Exploded View".
7. Lower transmission jack to the position where air breather can be removed.
8. Disconnect A/T air breather hose.
9. Disconnect transfer air breather hose and transfer control device air breather hose. Refer to TF-103,
10. Remove air breather tube from converter housing.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never bend the A/T air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
• Insert A/T air breather hose to A/T air breather tube all the way to the curve of the tube.
AT-522
AIR BREATHER HOSE
• When inserting A/T air breather hose (1) to the air breather
tube (for A/T), be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the A
spool (A) portion.
2 : Transfer air breather hose

B
3 : Transfer control device air breather hose
• Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) so
that the paint mark (B) is facing upward. AT
JPDIA1172ZZ
AT-523
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
JPDIA1161GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube A

4. A/T fluid cooler tube D 5. Clip 6. Bracket
7. Hose clamp 8. A/T fluid cooler hose A 9. A/T fluid cooler hose G
10. A/T fluid cooler hose F 11. A/T fluid cooler tube B 12. A/T fluid cooler hose B
13. A/T fluid cooler hose E 14. A/T fluid cooler 15. A/T fluid cooler tube C
16. A/T fluid cooler hose C 17. A/T fluid cooler hose D 18. Radiator core support
B. To radiator
: Vehicle front
AT-524
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
REMOVAL
1. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-16, "Removal and Installation".
B
2. Remove food lock assembly. Refer to BL-15, "Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control".
3. Remove steering pipe brackets (A), (B) and (C).
4. Remove A/T fluid cooler hoses from A/T fluid cooler. AT
5. Remove A/T fluid cooler mounting bolts (D) and nuts (E).
6. Remove A/T fluid cooler bracket from radiator core support.
7. Remove A/T fluid cooler from the vehicle. D
8. Remove control cable mounting bracket.
9. Remove front undercover.
10. Remove A/T fluid cooler hoses and A/T fluid cooler tubes. E
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes. JSDIA1869ZZ
NOTE: F
Cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. G
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer.
• Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses. H
Hose name Hose end Direction of paint mark Direction of hose clamp tab
A/T fluid cooler tube A side Upward Upward
A/T fluid cooler hose A I
A/T fluid cooler tube B side Rightward Rightward
A/T fluid cooler tube B side Frontward Frontward
A/T fluid cooler hose B
A/T fluid cooler tube C side Frontward Frontward J
A/T fluid cooler tube C side Frontward Frontward
A/T fluid cooler hose C
A/T fluid cooler Upward Upward
K
A/T fluid cooler Upward Upward and 45° backward
A/T fluid cooler hose D
A/T fluid cooler tube C side Frontward Frontward
A/T fluid cooler tube C side Frontward Frontward L
A/T fluid cooler hose E
A/T fluid cooler tube B side Frontward Frontward
A/T fluid cooler tube B side Upward Downward
A/T fluid cooler hose F M
Radiator Upward Downward
Radiator Downward Downward
A/T fluid cooler hose G
A/T fluid cooler tube D side Upward Rightward N
- Insert A/T fluid cooler hose according to dimension “L” described below.
AT-525
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A/T fluid cooler Tube

Insertion side tube (2) Dimension “L”
hose (1) type
A/T fluid cooler A/T fluid cooler tube A side

hose A A/T fluid cooler tube B side
A/T fluid cooler A/T fluid cooler tube B side

hose B A/T fluid cooler tube C side
A/T fluid cooler A/T fluid cooler tube C side

30 mm (1.18 in) [End
hose C A/T fluid cooler A reaches the 2-stage
bulge (C).]
A/T fluid cooler A/T fluid cooler
hose D A/T fluid cooler tube C side
A/T fluid cooler A/T fluid cooler tube C side

hose E A/T fluid cooler tube B side
A/T fluid cooler A/T fluid cooler tube B side

hose F Radiator Insert the hose until
B the hose touches A/T
Radiator fluid warmer.
A/T fluid cooler
30 mm (1.18 in) [End
hose G
A/T fluid cooler tube D side A reaches the 2-stage JSDIA1640ZZ
bulge (C).]
- Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2)
with dimension “A” from the hose edge.
Dimension “A” : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)

- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
SCIA8123E

Check for A/T fluid leakage.
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-438, "Adjustment".
AT-526
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

B
AT
JPDIA1173GB K
1. A/T assembly 2. Front cross member 3. A/T cross member

4. Engine mounting insulator (rear) L
A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to AT-527, "Removal and Installation".
M
REMOVAL N
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge. O
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake.
P
3. Remove rear engine undercover.
4. Remove front right wheel and tire assembly.
5. Remove front mudguard RH. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove front fender protector RH. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation of Front Fender Protector".
AT-527
7. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) (1) from A/T assem-
bly. Refer to EM-377, "Exploded View".
: Bolt
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
JSDIA1870ZZ
8. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-41, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
9. Turn crankshaft, and remove six tightening bolts ( ) of the drive
plate and the torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed
from the front of the engine.
10. Remove oxydation catalytic converter. Refer to EX-15, "WITH-
OUT DPF (DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER) MODELS :
Exploded View".
11. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-15, "WITHOUT DPF
(DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER) MODELS : Exploded View".
JSDIA1883ZZ
12. Remove oxidation catalytic converter. Refer to EM-309,
"Exploded View".
13. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler tube. Refer to AT-524, "Exploded View".
14. Put aside A/T fluid cooler tube from A/T assembly. Refer to AT-524, "Exploded View".
NOTE:
15. Remove the control cable from A/T assembly. Refer to AT-512, "Exploded View".
16. Remove the front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-3, "Removal and Installation".
17. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "Removal and Installation".
18. Disconnect all the connector on A/T assembly and transfer assembly.
19. Put aside A/T wiring harness.
CAUTION:
When setting a transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and
overflow plug.
21. Remove A/T cross member.
22. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear) from A/T assembly.
23. Support transfer assembly using a transmission jack.
24. Remove front cross member.
25. Disconnect A/T, transfer and transfer control device air breather hose. Refer to AT-522, "Exploded View".
26. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine.
27. Remove the A/T assembly with transfer from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
28. Remove A/T air breather hose. Refer to AT-522, "Exploded View".
29. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly. Refer to TF-108, "Removal and Installation".
NOTE:
INSTALLATION
AT-528
• Check fitting of the dowel pins ( ).
A
AT
JSDIA1689ZZ
D
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check
dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
E
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
F
Dimension “A” : Refer to AT-610, "Torque Convert-
er".
G
JPDIA0042ZZ
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts H
in accordance with the following standard.
Bolt position A I
Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine
Number of bolts 10
J
Bolt length “L”
60 (2.36)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
44.1 (4.5, 33) JSDIA1833ZZ
K
*: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube. Refer to AT-522, "Exploded View".
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily
L
tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley M
bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to
EM-323, "Removal and Installation".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after
N
converter is installed to drive plate.
O
• Check A/T fluid leakage.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to AT-441, "Inspection and Adjustment". P
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-438, "Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to AT-441, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform G sensor calibration when replacing A/T assembly. Refer to AT-436, "Special Repair Requirement".
AT-529
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01B]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

JPDIA1140GB
AT-530
1. Torque converter 2. Converter housing 3. Oil pump housing oil seal A

4. Oil pump housing 5. O-ring 6. Oil pump cover
7. O-ring 8. D-ring 9. D-ring
10. Front brake piston 11. Front brake spring retainer 12. Snap ring B
13. D-ring 14. D-ring 15. 2346 brake piston
16. 2346 brake spring retainer 17. Snap ring 18. Seal ring
19. 2346 brake dish plate 20. 2346 brake driven plate 21. 2346 brake drive plate AT
22. 2346 brake retaining plate 23. Snap ring 24. Bearing race
25. Needle bearing 26. Under drive sun gear 27. Needle bearing
28. Front brake retaining plate 29. Front brake drive plate 30. Front brake driven plate D
31. Front brake retaining plate 32. Snap ring 33. 1st one-way clutch
34. Snap ring 35. Under drive carrier assembly 36. Front brake hub assembly
: Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1215) or equivalent. E
Refer to GI-9, "Component" for symbols not described on the above.
TYPE 1 F
JPDIA1141ZZ
AT-531
1. Needle bearing 2. Snap ring 3. Front carrier assembly

4. Needle bearing 5. O-ring 6. Seal ring
7. Input clutch assembly 8. Rear internal gear 9. Needle bearing
16. Seal ring 17. Rear sun gear 18. 2nd one-way clutch
22. Snap ring 23. Bearing race 24. Bearing race
25. Needle bearing
TYPE 2
JPDIA1204ZZ

7. Input clutch assembly 8. Rear internal gear 9. Needle bearing
A T - 5 3 2
16. Seal ring 17. Rear sun gear 18. 2nd one-way clutch
19. Snap ring 20. Needle bearing 21. High and low reverse clutch hub A
22. Snap ring 23. Bearing race 24. Bearing race
25. Needle bearing
Refer to GI-9, "Component" for symbols not described on the above. B
TYPE 1
AT
JSDIA1895ZZ
AT-533
1. Bearing race 2. High and low reverse clutch as- 3. Needle bearing
sembly
13. Snap ring 14. Reverse brake spring retainer 15. Reverse brake return spring
AT-534
TYPE 2
A
AT
JPDIA1205ZZ
P
1. Bearing race 2. High and low reverse clutch as- 3. Needle bearing
sembly
13. Snap ring 14. Reverse brake spring retainer 15. Reverse brake return spring
AT-535
JSDIA1927GB
1. Parking rod 2. Manual plate 3. Manual shaft

4. Retaining pin 5. Detent spring 6. Oil seal
7. Bracket 8. O-ring 9. Self-sealing bolt
10. Baffle plate 11. O-ring 12. Seal ring
AT-536
13. Snap ring 14. Oil pan gasket 15. Oil pan
16. Overflow plug 17. Drain plug 18. Drain plug gasket A
19. Oil pan mounting bolt 20. Magnet 21. Clip
22. Control valve & TCM 23. Joint connector 24. Transmission case
25. Retaining pin 26. Output speed sensor 27. Gasket B
28. Needle bearing 29. Parking gear 30. Seal ring
31. Output shaft 32. Bearing race
AT
JPDIA1168ZZ
I
1. Parking actuator support 2. Parking pawl 3. Pawl shaft
4. Return spring 5. Needle bearing 6. Adapter case
7. Self-sealing bolt 8. Rear oil seal 9. Bracket
J
10. Bracket
K
AT-537
Oil Channel INFOID:0000000006363166
JSDIA1716GB
AT-538
Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races INFOID:0000000006363167
AT
JSDIA1732ZZ
L
Location Item Outer diameter mm (in)
A (1) Needle bearing 94 (3.701)
(2) Bearing race 58.6 (2.307) M
B
(3) Needle bearing 60 (2.362)
C (4) Needle bearing 84.6 (3.331)
N
D (5) Needle bearing 77 (3.031)
E (6) Needle bearing 47 (1.850)
(7) Needle bearing 84 (3.307) O
F
(8) Bearing race 82 (3.228)
G (9) Needle bearing 80 (3.150)
P
H (10) Needle bearing 92 (3.622)
(11) Bearing race 60 (2.362)
(12) Bearing race 61.1 (2.406)
I
(14) Bearing race 61.9 (2.437)
J (15) Needle bearing 62.8 (2.472)
AT-539
Location Item Outer diameter mm (in)
K (16) Needle bearing 92 (3.622)
L (17) Needle bearing 65 (2.559)
(18) Bearing race 58 (2.283)
M
Location of Snap Rings INFOID:0000000006363168
JSDIA1734ZZ
Location Shape of snap ring Outer diameter mm (in)

1 A 159.9 (6.295)
2 B 159 (6.260)
3 B 216 (8.504)
4 B 180.4 (7.102)
5 C 171.5 (6.752)
6 B 169 (6.654)
7 B 180.5 (7.106)
8 B 181.0 (7.126)
9 D 64.6 (2.543)
10 B 136 (5.354)
11 E 70.5 (2.776)
12 B 135 (5.315)
13 A 48.4 (1.906)
CAUTION:
Never disassemble parts behind drum support. Refer to AT-359, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional
View".
AT-540
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while A
pulling straight out.
AT
SCIA5010E
D
3. Remove tightening bolts ( ) for converter housing and trans-

mission case. E
4. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing. F
JPDIA1107ZZ
H
5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.
K
SCIA5011E
6. Remove tightening bolts ( ) for oil pump assembly and trans-

L
mission case.
JPDIA1108ZZ
O
AT-541
7. Attach the sliding hammers (SST: ST25850000) (A) to oil pump
assembly (1) and extract it evenly from transmission case.
B : Sliding hammer attachment position

CAUTION:
• Fully tighten the sliding hammer screws.
• Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump
assembly edge surface.
JPDIA1109ZZ
8. Remove O-ring (1) from oil pump assembly.
JPDIA1110ZZ
9. Remove bearing race (1) from oil pump assembly.
JPDIA1111ZZ
10. Remove seal ring (1) from oil pump assembly.
JSDIA1721ZZ
AT-542
11. Remove under drive sun gear (1) from under drive carrier
assembly. A
AT
JPDIA1112ZZ
D
12. Remove needle bearing (1) from under drive sun gear.
G
JPDIA1113ZZ
13. Remove needle bearing (1) from under drive carrier assembly.
H
JPDIA1114ZZ
K
14. Remove front brake component part (retaining plates, drive
plates, and driven plate) from transmission case by using a wire
(A) with its tip bent like a hook. L
N
JPDIA1115ZZ
15. Remove snap ring (1) from transmission case using a flat- O
bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch transmission case and 1st one- P
way clutch.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
JPDIA1116ZZ
AT-543
16. Remove input clutch assembly (with 1st one-way clutch, under
drive carrier assembly, front brake hub, front carrier assembly,
and rear internal gear) (1) from transmission case.
JPDIA1117ZZ
17. Remove 1st one-way clutch (1) from front brake hub.
JPDIA1118ZZ
18. Remove under drive carrier assembly (with front brake hub) (1)
from front carrier assembly.
JPDIA1119ZZ
19. Remove needle bearing (1) from front carrier assembly.
JPDIA1120ZZ
20. Remove seal rings (1) from input clutch assembly.
JPDIA1121ZZ
AT-544
21. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a
unit. A
AT
SCIA5017E
D
22. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.
G
SCIA5697E
23. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly. H
SCIA2805E K
24. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
L
SCIA2804E
25. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly. O
SCIA5175E
AT-545
26. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA2803E
27. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly, and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needle
bearing.
SCIA5018E
28. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch
assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface.
SCIA2306E
29. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.
SCIA5019E
30. Remove needle bearing from drum support.
SCIA5198E
AT-546
31. Remove snap ring (1) from joint connector (A).
A
AT
JPDIA0007ZZ
D
32. Push joint connector (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E
G
JPDIA0008ZZ
33. Remove oil pan (1) and oil pan gasket. H
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt I
JPDIA1073ZZ K
34. Remove magnets (1) from oil pan.
N
JPDIA0009ZZ
35. Disconnect output speed sensor connector (A). O

CAUTION:
36. Disengage terminal clips ( ). P
JPDIA1104ZZ
AT-547
37. Remove control valve & TCM mounting bolts and clip (1) from
the control valve & TCM.
: Front

A 43 (1.69) 3
B 40 (1.57) 2
C 54 (2.13) 6
JPDIA1105ZZ
D 50 (1.97) 2
E* 50 (1.97) 1
*: Reamer bolt
38. Remove the control valve & TCM (1) from transmission case.
CAUTION:
When removing, never with the manual valve notch and
JSDIA1823ZZ
39. Remove joint connector (1) from the control valve & TCM using
a flat-bladed screwdriver (A).
JSDIA1718ZZ
40. Disconnect TCM connector (A).

CAUTION:
JSDIA1813ZZ
AT-548
41. Remove bracket (1) from adapter case assembly.
A
AT
JSDIA1908ZZ
D
42. Remove tightening bolts for adapter case assembly and trans-
mission case.
E
1 : Bracket
A : Bolt
B : Self-sealing bolt
F
JPDIA1155ZZ
K
43. Tap adapter case assembly using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage adapter case. L
N
SCIA5201E
44. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (With O

needle bearing)
SCIA5186E
AT-549
45. Remove gasket from transmission case.
SCIA5231E
46. Remove bearing race from output shaft.
SCIA5245E
47. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/

right.
SCIA5030E
48. Remove parking gear (1) from output shaft (2).
JPDIA0029ZZ
49. Remove seal rings (1) from output shaft.
JPDIA0030ZZ
AT-550
50. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
A
AT
SCIA5031E
D
: Bolt E
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble. F
edge magnetic area.
G
JSDIA1321ZZ
52. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) with 2 flat-bladed H
screwdrivers.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch transmission case and reverse
brake retaining plate. I
NOTE:
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap J
with a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using a another
screwdriver.
53. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case. SCIA5032E K
54. Remove N-spring from transmission case.

L
SCIA5214E
55. Remove reverse brake component part (drive plates, driven O

plates, and dish plates) from transmission case.
SCIA2322E
AT-551
56. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch transmission case and spring
retainer.
SCIA2323E
57. Remove reverse brake spring retainer and reverse brake return
spring from transmission case.
SCIA2324E
58. Remove seal rings from drum support.
SCIA3333E
59. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.
SCIA2796E
AT-552
60. Remove reverse brake piston (1) from transmission case with
compressed air. Refer to AT-538, "Oil Channel". A
A : Reverse brake pressure hole

CAUTION: B
tons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the pistons.
AT
G
JSDIA1819ZZ
61. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.

H
SCIA6330E
K
62. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with pair of nippers.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cut retaining pin. L
N
SCIA2329E
63. Remove manual plate (1) from detent spring (2). O

64. Remove parking rod (3) from manual plate.
65. Install manual plate to detent spring.
P
JPDIA1131ZZ
AT-553
66. Use a pin punch [4 mm (0.16 in) dia. commercial service tool] to
knock out retaining pin (1).
JPDIA1132ZZ
67. Remove manual plate from manual shaft.
SCIA5715E
68. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
SCIA5716E
69. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case.
SCIA2331E
70. Remove detent spring (1) from transmission case.
: Bolt
JPDIA1134ZZ
AT-554
71. Remove needle bearing (1) from adapter case.
A
AT
SCIA6179J
D
72. Remove parking actuator support from adapter case.
G
SCIA3423E
73. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from H
adapter case.
SCIA3424E
K
74. Remove return spring (1) from parking pawl (2).
N
SCIA6180J
75. Remove rear oil seal from adapter case using a flat-bladed O
screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch adapter case. P
JPDIA0247ZZ
AT-555
Assembly INFOID:0000000006363170
1. As shown in the figure, use a drift [22 mm (0.87 in) dia. commer-
cial service tool] to drive manual shaft oil seals into the transmis-
sion case until it is flush.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse manual shaft oil seals.
• Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.
SCIA5259E
2. Install detent spring to transmission case. Tighten detent spring

bolt to the specified torque.
: Bolt
JPDIA1134ZZ
3. Install manual shaft to transmission case.
SCIA5716E
4. Install parking rod (1) to manual plate (2).
JSDIA1820ZZ
AT-556
5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.
A
AT
SCIA5715E
D
6. Install retaining pin (1) into the manual plate and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft
with a pin punch. E
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate.
A : Approx. 2 mm (0.08in) F
CAUTION:
Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm (0.08±0.020 in) over the
manual plate. G
JPDIA1133ZZ
7. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
H
a. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual
shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission I
case.
CAUTION:
Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm (0.20±0.04 in) over the trans-
mission case. J
SCIA2427E
K
8. Install D-rings to reverse brake piston.
N
SCIA6330E
9. Install reverse brake piston to transmission case. O
SCIA2325E
AT-557
10. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface.
CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to AT-539,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
SCIA2796E
11. Install seal rings to drum support.
SCIA3333E
12. Install reverse brake spring retainer and reverse brake return
spring to transmission case.
SCIA2324E
13. Set the clutch spring compressor (SST: KV31102400) on

reverse brake spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing spring
retainer) to transmission case while compressing return spring.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver
so that snap ring tension is slightly weak.
SCIA6700E
AT-558
14. Install reverse brake component part (drive plates, driven plates,
and dish plates) to transmission case. A
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate B
3 : Drive plate (eight pieces)
4 : Driven plate (eight pieces)
5 : Dish plate AT
6 : Dish plate
Check order of plates. D
15. Assemble N-spring.

16. Install reverse brake retaining plate to transmission case. E
K
SCIA5249E
17. Install snap ring to transmission case.

CAUTION: L
Be careful not to damage snap ring.
SCIA2439E
AT-559
18. Measure clearance between reverse brake retaining plate and
snap ring. If not within specified clearance, select proper retain-
ing plate.
Specified reverse brake clearance “A”

Standard: AT-610, "Reverse Brake Clearance".
Retaining plate: Refer to AT-610, "Reverse Brake Clear-
ance"
SCIA3129E
19. Install needle bearing to transmission case.

CAUTION:
SCIA5031E
20. Install output speed sensor (1) to transmission case and tighten
output speed sensor mounting bolt ( ) to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble.
edge magnetic area.
JSDIA1321ZZ
21. As shown in the figure, use the drift [64 mm (2.52 in) dia. com-
mercial service tool] (A) to drive rear oil seal into adapter case
until it is flush.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse rear oil seal.
JSDIA0247ZZ
SCIA6180J
AT-560
23. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to adapter
case. A
AT
SCIA3424E
D
24. Install parking actuator support to adapter case.
G
SCIA3423E
25. Install needle bearing (1) to adapter case.

H
CAUTION:
I
SCIA6179J
K
26. Install seal rings (1) to output shaft.
N
JPDIA0030ZZ
27. Install parking gear (1) to output shaft (2). O
JPDIA0029ZZ
AT-561
28. Install output shaft to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)
SCIA5030E
29. Install bearing race to output shaft.
SCIA5245E
30. Install gasket onto transmission case.

CAUTION:
from the transmission case and adapter case assembly
mounting surfaces.
• Never reuse gasket.
SCIA5231E
31. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case.

CAUTION:
the parking actuator support when assembling the adapter
case assembly.
SCIA5186E
AT-562
32. Tighten adapter case assembly bolts to the specified torque.
A
1 : Bracket
A : Bolt
B : Self-sealing bolt B
AT
G
JPDIA1155ZZ
33. Install bracket (1) to adapter case assembly. Tighten bracket

bolts to the specified torque. H
JSDIA1908ZZ
K
34. Install needle bearing to drum support.
CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to AT-539, L
N
SCIA5198E
35. Install direct clutch assembly to reverse brake.

O
CAUTION:
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place.
P
SCIA5019E
AT-563
36. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly to direct clutch.
SCIA2306E
37. Align the drive plate using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA3169E
38. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly,
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.
SCIA5018E
CAUTION:
Make sure that portion “A” of high and low reverse clutch
drum protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond por-
tion “B” of rear sun gear.
SCIA3130E
AT-564
39. Install needle bearing to rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION: A
B
AT
SCIA2803E
D
40. Install bearing race to rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
E
G
SCIA5175E
41. Install rear carrier assembly to direct clutch drum.

H
SCIA2462E
K
42. Install needle bearing (rear side) to mid carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to AT-539, L
N
SCIA2804E
43. Install needle bearing (front side) to mid carrier assembly. O

CAUTION:
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races". P
SCIA2805E
AT-565
44. Install mid carrier assembly to rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5017E
45. Install seal rings (1) to input clutch assembly.
JPDIA1121ZZ
46. Install needle bearing (1) to front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
JPDIA1120ZZ
AT-566
47. Install input clutch assembly (with front carrier assembly and
rear internal gear) (1) to transmission case. A
CAUTION:
Check that the needle bearing (2) is securely positioned. If
the needle bearing position is misaligned, adjust it to the
B
specified position.
AT
G
JSDIA1714ZZ
48. Install 1st one-way clutch (1) to front brake hub (with under drive
carrier) (2). H
49. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.
a. Hold 1st one-way clutch.
I
b. Check front brake hub for correct locking and unlocking direc-
tions.
: Unlocked J
: Locked
JSDIA1713ZZ
CAUTION: K
If not shown in figure, check installation direction of 1st one-way clutch.
50. Install under drive carrier (with 1st one-way clutch) (1) to trans-
mission case. L
JSDIA1715ZZ
O
AT-567
51. Install snap ring (1) to transmission case.
CAUTION:
JPDIA1116ZZ
52. Install front brake component part (retaining plates, drive plates,
and driven plate) to transmission case.
1 : Retaining plate (thin)

2 : Drive plate
3 : Driven plate
4 : Retaining plate (thick)
: Front
CAUTION:
Check order of plates. JPDIA1154ZZ
53. Install needle bearing (1) to under drive carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
JPDIA1114ZZ
54. Install under drive sun gear (1) to under drive carrier assembly.
JPDIA1112ZZ
55. Adjustment of total end play “T”.

• Measure clearance between bearing race (1) and oil pump
cover (2).
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is
within specifications.
JSDIA1696ZZ
AT-568
a. Measure dimensions “K” and “L”, and calculate dimension “J”. A

1 : Transmission case
2 : Under drive sun gear
B
A : Straightedge
“J”: Distance between the oil pump fitting surface

AT
of transmission case and the needle bearing
mating surface of under drive sun gear.
J=K–L JSDIA1697ZZ
D
i. Measure dimension “K” between the converter housing fitting
surface of transmission case (1) and the needle bearing mating
surface of under drive sun gear (2). E
CAUTION:
• Never change the straightedge (A) installation position
before the completion of “L” measurement.
• Measure dimension “K” in at least three places, and take F
the average.
G
JSDIA1698ZZ
ii. Measure dimension “L” between the converter housing fitting H

surface of transmission case and the oil pump fitting surface of
transmission case.
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “L” in at least three places, and take I
the average.
iii. Calculate dimension “J”.
J
J=K–L
JSDIA1699ZZ
K
b. Measure dimensions “M1” and “M2”, and calculate dimension
“M”.
L
1 : Bearing race
2 : Needle bearing
3 : Oil pump assembly M
A : Straightedge
“M” : Distance between the transmission case fit- N

ting surface of oil pump and the needle bearing JSDIA1700ZZ
on oil pump.
M = M1 – M 2 O
AT-569
i. Place bearing race (1) and needle bearing (2) on oil pump
assembly (3).
JSDIA1701ZZ
ii. Measure dimension “M1” between the transmission case fitting

surface of oil pump and the end of oil pump.
1 : Bearing race
2 : Needle bearing
3 : Oil pump assembly
A : Straightedge
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “M1” in at least three places, and take
the average.
JSDIA1702ZZ
iii. Measure dimension “M2” between the needle bearing on oil

pump and the end of oil pump.
1 : Bearing race
2 : Needle bearing
A : Straightedge
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “M2” in at least three places, and take
the average.
JSDIA1703ZZ
iv. Calculate dimension “M”.
M = M1– M2
c. Adjust total end play “T”.
1 : Bearing race
T=J–M
Total end play “T” : Refer to AT-610, "Total End Play".
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications.
JSDIA1696ZZ
Bearing races : Refer to AT-610, "Total End Play".
AT-570
56. Adjustment of front brake clearance “C”.
• Measure clearance between front brake piston (1) and front A
brake retaining plate (2).
• Select proper thickness of front brake retaining plat so that
clearance is within specifications.
B
AT
JSDIA1704ZZ
D
a. Measure dimensions “O” and “P”, and calculate dimension “N”.
1 : Transmission case E
2 : Front brake retaining plate
A : Straightedge
F
“N”: Distance between the oil pump fitting surface
of transmission case and the front brake retain-
ing plate. G
N=O–P JSDIA1705ZZ
i. Measure dimension “O” between the converter housing fitting H

surface of transmission case (1) and the front brake retaining
plate (2).
I
A : Straightedge J
CAUTION:
• Never change the straightedge (A) installation position
before the completion of “P” measurement. K
• Measure dimension “O” in at least three places, and take JSDIA1706ZZ
the average.
ii. Measure dimension “P” between the converter housing fitting L

surface of transmission case and the oil pump fitting surface of
transmission case.
M
A : Straightedge
CAUTION: N
Measure dimension “P” in at least three places, and take
the average.
iii. Calculate dimension “N”. O
JSDIA1707ZZ
N=O–P
P
AT-571
b. Measure dimensions “Q1” and “Q2”, and calculate dimension
“Q”.
1 : Front brake piston

A : Straightedge
“Q” : Distance between the transmission case fit-

ting surface of oil pump and the front brake pis-
ton.
JSDIA1708ZZ
Q = Q1– Q2
i. Measure dimension “Q1” between the transmission case fitting

surface of oil pump and the straightedge on front brake piston.

A : Straightedge
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “Q1” in at least three places, and take
the average.
JSDIA1709ZZ
ii. Measure dimension “Q2” of the straightedge.

A : Straightedge
iii. Calculate dimension “Q”.
Q = Q1– Q2
JSDIA1711ZZ
c. Adjust front brake clearance “C”.

C=N–Q
Front brake clearance “C” : Refer to AT-610, "Front
Brake Clearance".
• Select proper thickness of front brake retaining plate so that
front brake clearance is within specifications. JSDIA1704ZZ
Retaining plate : Refer to AT-610, "Front Brake Clearance".
AT-572
57. Remove under drive sun gear (1) from under drive carrier
assembly. A
AT
JPDIA1112ZZ
D
58. Install needle bearing (1) to under drive sun gear.
CAUTION:
E
G
JPDIA1113ZZ
59. Install O-ring (1) to oil pump assembly.

H
JPDIA1110ZZ
K
60. Install seal ring (1) to oil pump assembly.
N
JSDIA1721ZZ
61. Install bearing race (1) to oil pump assembly. O
JPDIA1111ZZ
AT-573
62. Install under drive sun gear (with needle bearing) (1) to oil pump
assembly (2).
JSDIA1712ZZ
63. Install oil pump assembly (with under drive sun gear) to trans-
mission case.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.
SCIA2811E
64. Apply recommended sealant to oil pump assembly as shown in

the figure.
: Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1215) or equivalent.
CAUTION:
from the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting
bolt mounting surfaces.
JSDIA1720ZZ
65. Tighten oil pump bolts ( ) to the specified torque.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.
JPDIA1108ZZ
66. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.
SCIA5011E
AT-574
67. Install converter housing to transmission case, and tighten con-
verter housing bolts ( ) to the specified torque. A
AT
JPDIA1107ZZ
D
68. Connect TCM connector (A).
G
JSDIA1813ZZ
69. Install joint connector (1) to the control valve & TCM. H
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to O-ring of joint connector.
I
JSDIA1719ZZ K
70. Install the control valve & TCM (1) to transmission case.
L
JSDIA1823ZZ
O
CAUTION:
AT-575
• Make sure that input speed sensor securely installs input
speed sensor holes (A).
so as not to disturb installation of the control valve &
TCM.
• Adjust joint connector of the control valve & TCM to ter-
minal hole of transmission case.
JPDIA1106ZZ

SCIA5035E
71. Install bolts and clip (1) to the control valve & TCM. Tighten bolt
(E) to the specified torque before tightening the other than bolts.
: Front

A 43 (1.69) 3
B 40 (1.57) 2
C 54 (2.13) 6
JPDIA1105ZZ
D 50 (1.97) 2
E* 50 (1.97) 1
*: Reamer bolt
72. Connect output speed sensor connector (A).
73. Engage output speed sensor harness with terminal clips ( ).
JPDIA1104ZZ
AT-576
74. Pull down joint connector (1).
CAUTION: A
AT
JSDIA1764ZZ
D
75. Install snap ring (1) to joint connector (2).
G
JSDIA1765ZZ
76. Install magnets (1) to oil pan.

H
77. Install oil pan gasket to transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket.
• Install it in the direction to align hole positions. I
from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
J
JPDIA0009ZZ
K
78. Install oil pan (1) to transmission case.
: Front L
: Oil pan mounting bolt
CAUTION: M
N
JPDIA1073ZZ
79. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri- O
Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque.
P
: Front
CAUTION:
Never reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
80. Install drain plug to oil pan. Tighten drain plug to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
JPDIA1074ZZ
Never reuse drain plug gasket.
AT-577
81. Pour ATF into torque converter.
• Approximately 2 liter (1-3/4 Imp qt) of ATF is required for a
new torque converter.
• When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of ATF as was drained.
SAT428DA
82. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-

verter with notches of oil pump.
CAUTION:
Install torque converter while rotating it.
SCIA5010E
83. Measure dimension “A” to make sure that torque converter is in

proper position.
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension “A” : Refer to AT-610, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0042ZZ
Inspection INFOID:0000000006363171

Oil Pan
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, replace radiator. Refer to CO-
70, "Exploded View".
SCIA5199E
Torque Converter
AT-578
Check torque converter one-way clutch using a check tool as shown
at figure. A
1. Insert a check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
2. When fixing bearing support with a check tool, rotate one-way B
clutch spline using a screwdriver.
3.
Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace AT
torque converter assembly.
G
SCIA3171E
1st One-way Clutch

Check operation of 1st one-way clutch. H
1. Install 1st one-way clutch (1) to front brake hub (with under drive
carrier).
2. Hold 1st one-way clutch. I
3. Check front brake hub for correct locking and unlocking direc-
tions. If necessary, replace 1st one-way clutch.
J
: Unlocked
: Locked
JSDIA1713ZZ K
Under Drive Sun Gear
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the under drive sun gear.
L
Mid Carrier Assembly
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the mid carrier assembly.
Rear Carrier Assembly M
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the rear carrier assembly.
Reverse Brake Drive Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace the plate. N
Reverse Brake Retaining Plate, Driven Plates and Dish Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace the plate.
O
Each Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Parking Actuator Support and Parking Pawl
P
AT-579
If the contact surface on parking actuator support and parking pawl
has excessive wear, abrasion, bend or any other damage, replace
the components.
SCIA5143E
SCIA5144E
AT-580
OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
A
AT
J
JPDIA1089GB
1. Oil pump housing oil seal 2. Oil pump housing 3. O-ring K

4. Oil pump cover 5. O-ring 6. D-ring
7. D-ring 8. Front brake piston 9. Front brake spring retainer
10. Snap ring 11. D-ring 12. D-ring L
13. 2346 brake piston 14. 2346 brake spring retainer 15. Snap ring
16. Seal ring 17. 2346 brake dish plate 18. 2346 brake driven plate
19. 2346 brake drive plate 20. 2346 brake retaining plate 21. Snap ring M
N
1. Remove snap ring (1) from oil pump assembly using a flat- O
bladed screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch oil pump cover and 2346 brake P
retaining plate.
JPDIA1090ZZ
AT-581
2. Remove 2346 brake component part (retaining plate, drive
plates, driven plates, and dish plate) (1) from oil pump assembly.
JPDIA1091ZZ
3. Remove seal ring (1) from oil pump assembly.
JPDIA1092ZZ
4. Set the clutch spring compressor (SST: KV31103800) (A) on

front brake spring retainer and remove snap ring (fixing front
brake spring retainer) (1) from oil pump assembly while com-
pressing return spring.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.
JSDIA1729ZZ
5. Remove front brake spring retainer (1) from oil pump assembly.
JPDIA1094ZZ
6. Set the clutch spring compressor (SST: KV31102400) (A) on

2346 brake spring retainer and remove snap ring (fixing 2346
brake spring retainer) (1) from oil pump assembly while com-
pressing return spring.
B : Press
CAUTION:
JSDIA1730ZZ
AT-582
7. Remove 2346 brake spring retainer (1) from oil pump assembly.
A
AT
JPDIA1096ZZ
D
8. Remove front brake piston (1) from oil pump assembly with
compressed air. Refer to AT-538, "Oil Channel".
E
A : Front brake pressure hole
CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis- F
ton incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the piston.
G
JPDIA1097ZZ
K
9. Remove D-ring (inner) (1) and D-ring (outer) (2) from front brake
piston.
L
N
JPDIA1098ZZ
AT-583
10. Remove 2346 brake piston (1) from oil pump assembly with
compressed air. Refer to AT-538, "Oil Channel".
A : 2346 brake pressure hole

CAUTION:
ton incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the piston.
JPDIA1099ZZ
11. Remove D-ring (large) (1) and D-ring (small) (2) from 2346
brake piston.
JPDIA1100ZZ
12. loosen bolts in numerical order shown in the figure and remove
oil pump housing from oil pump cover.
: Bolt
JPDIA1101ZZ
13. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
SCIA2840E
AT-584
14. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
A
AT
SCIA2841E
D
15. Remove O-ring (1) from oil pump cover.
G
JPDIA1102ZZ
Assembly INFOID:0000000006363174 H
1. Install O-ring (1) to oil pump cover.

I
JPDIA1102ZZ
L
2. Install O-ring to oil pump housing.
O
SCIA2841E
AT-585
3. Using the drift, install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump
housing until it is flush.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil seal.
• Apply ATF to oil seal.
SCIA5313E
4. Install oil pump housing to oil pump cover and tighten bolts ( )
to the specified torque in numerical order shown in the figure
after temporarily tightening them.
JPDIA1101ZZ
5. Install D-ring (large) (1) and D-ring (small) (2) to 2346 brake pis-
ton.
JPDIA1100ZZ
6. Install 2346 brake piston (1) to oil pump assembly.
JSDIA1722ZZ
7. Install D-ring (inner) (1) and D-ring (outer) (2) to front brake pis-
ton.
JPDIA1098ZZ
AT-586
8. Install front brake piston (1) to oil pump assembly.
A
AT
JSDIA1723ZZ
D
9. Install 2346 brake spring retainer (1) to oil pump assembly.
G
JPDIA1096ZZ
10. Set the clutch spring compressor (SST: KV31102400) (A) on H

2346 brake spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing 2346
brake spring retainer) (1) to oil pump assembly while compress-
ing return spring.
I
B : Press
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively. J
JSDIA1730ZZ K
11. Install front brake spring retainer (1) to oil pump assembly.
L
JPDIA1094ZZ
12. Set the clutch spring compressor (SST: KV31103800) (A) on O

front brake spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing front
brake spring retainer) (1) to oil pump assembly while compress-
ing return spring. P
CAUTION:
JSDIA1729ZZ
AT-587
13. Install seal ring (1) to oil pump assembly.
JPDIA1092ZZ
14. Install 2346 brake component part (retaining plate, drive plates,
driven plates, dish plate, and snap ring) to oil pump assembly.
1 : Dish plate
2 : Driven plate (five pieces)
3 : Drive plate (five pieces)
4 : Retaining plate
5 : Snap ring
CAUTION:
• Check the order of plates. JPDIA1153ZZ
• Never install snap ring mating part (A) to the clearance

groove [(B) shown in the figure] of oil pump cover.
JSDIA1724ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Each Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace snap ring.
Each Spring Retainer
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace spring retainer.
2346 Brake Drive Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace drive plates and driven plates.
2346 Brake Retaining Plate, Driven Plates and Dish Plate
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace retaining plate and dish plate.
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY
2346 Brake Clearance
AT-588
Set a dial indicator (A) as shown in the figure. Blow air into 2346
brake oil pressure hole (B), and measure 2346 brake clearance. If A
clearance is outside the specified value, adjust clearance by select-
ing an appropriate snap ring (1). Refer to AT-538, "Oil Channel".
B
Air pressure : 300 kPa (3 bar, 3.06 kg/cm2, 43.5 psi)
2346 brake : Refer to AT-611, "2346 Brake Clear-
clearance ance". AT
CAUTION:
Never exceed the specified air pressure value. JPDIA1148ZZ
AT-589
UNDER DRIVE CARRIER, FRONT BRAKE HUB
JPDIA1127ZZ
1. Snap ring 2. Under drive carrier assembly 3. Front brake hub
1. Remove snap ring (1) from front brake hub using a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch front brake hub and under drive
carrier assembly.
JPDIA1128ZZ
2. Remove under drive carrier assembly (1) from front brake hub.
JPDIA1129ZZ
AT-590
3. Remove snap ring (1) from front brake hub using a flat-bladed
screwdriver. A
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch front brake hub.
B
AT
JPDIA1130ZZ
D
1. Install snap ring (1) to front brake hub. E

CAUTION:
F
JPDIA1130ZZ
H
2. Install under drive carrier assembly (1) to front brake hub.

I
JPDIA1129ZZ
L
3. Install snap ring (1) to front brake hub using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch front brake hub. M
O
JPDIA1128ZZ
P

• Each Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace snap ring.
• Under Drive Carrier Assembly
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace under drive carrier assembly.
• Front Brake Hub
AT-591
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace front brake hub.
AT-592
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
A
TYPE 1 B
AT
JPDIA1122GB
N
7. Input clutch drum 8. Input clutch driven plate 9. Input clutch drive plate O
10. Input clutch retaining plate 11. Snap ring 12. Rear internal gear
P
AT-593
TYPE 2
JPDIA1189ZZ

7. Input clutch drum 8. Input clutch dish plate 9. Input clutch driven plate
10. Input clutch drive plate 11. Input clutch retaining plate 12. Snap ring
AT-594
A
1. Remove needle bearing (1) from front carrier assembly.
AT
D
JPDIA1120ZZ
2. Compress snap ring (1) using flat-bladed screwdrivers (A). E

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear internal gear.
F
3. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.
4. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly.
G
JPDIA1123ZZ H
5.
6. Remove snap ring (1) from front carrier assembly.

CAUTION: I
JPDIA1159ZZ
L
7. Remove O-ring (1) and seal rings (2) from input clutch assem-
bly.
M
O
JPDIA1124ZZ
AT-595
8. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.
SCIA2853E
9. Remove snap ring from input clutch drum using a flat-bladed

screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear input clutch drum and input
clutch retaining plate.
10. Remove input clutch component part (drive plates, driven plates,
retaining plate and dish plate*) from input clutch drum.
*: Type 2 only
SCIA2864E
1. Install input clutch component part (drive plates, driven plates,

and retaining plate) to input clutch drum. (Type 1)
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate (seven pieces)
4 : Driven plate (seven pieces)
CAUTION:
Check order of plates.
JPDIA1125ZZ
2. Install input clutch component part (dish plate, drive plates,

driven plates, and retaining plate) to input clutch drum. (Type 2)
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate (seven pieces)
4 : Driven plate (seven pieces)
5 : Dish plate
CAUTION:
Check order of plates. JPDIA1193ZZ
AT-596
3. Install snap ring to input clutch drum using a flat-bladed screw-
driver. A
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch input clutch drum and input
B
AT
SCIA2864E
D
4. Install needle bearing to input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
E
G
SCIA2853E
5. Install O-ring (1) and seal rings (2) to input clutch assembly.
H
JPDIA1124ZZ
K
6. Install snap ring (1) to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively. L
N
JPDIA1159ZZ
7. Compress snap ring (1) using flat-bladed screwdrivers (A). O

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear internal gear.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring. P
8. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear.
JPDIA1123ZZ
AT-597
9. Install needle bearing (1) to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
JPDIA1120ZZ

Front Carrier Snap Ring
Input Clutch Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns. If necessary, replace input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drive Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Dish Plate (Type 2)
Input Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
Front Carrier
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace rear internal gear.
AT-598
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
A
HUB
B
AT
JSDIA1758ZZ
H
1. Mid sun gear 2. Seal ring 3. Rear sun gear
4. 2nd one-way clutch 5. Snap ring 6. Needle bearing
7. High and low reverse clutch hub 8. Snap ring 9. Bearing race
I
10. Bearing race 11. Needle bearing
J
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing races from high and low
reverse clutch hub. K
SCIA5238E
N
2. Remove snap ring from mid sun gear assembly using pair of
snap ring pliers.
CAUTION: O
SCIA2855E
AT-599
3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly.
SCIA2856E
4. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.
SCIA2857E
5. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.
SCIA7018E
6. Remove snap ring from rear sun gear using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear sun gear and 2nd one-way
clutch.
SCIA2859E
7. Remove 2nd one-way clutch from rear sun gear.
JSDIA1817ZZ
AT-600
8. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.
A
AT
SCIA2861E
D
1. Install seal rings to mid sun gear. E
H
SCIA2861E
2. Install 2nd one-way clutch to rear sun gear.

I
JSDIA1817ZZ
L
3. Install snap ring to rear sun gear using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear sun gear and 2nd one-way M
clutch.
O
SCIA2859E
AT-601
4. Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly.
SCIA7018E
5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub.

CAUTION:
SCIA2857E
6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assem-
bly.
SCIA2856E
7. Install snap ring to mid sun gear assembly using pair of snap
ring pliers.
CAUTION:
SCIA2855E
8. Check operation of 2nd one-way clutch.
AT-602
a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
b. Check 2nd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking A
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of B
2nd one-way clutch.
AT
SCIA3132E
D
9. Install needle bearing and bearing races to high and low reverse
clutch hub.
CAUTION:
E
G
SCIA5238E
Inspection INFOID:0000000006363187 H

2nd One-way Clutch I
1. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
2. Check 2nd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking J
directions. If necessary, replace 2nd one-way clutch.
SCIA3132E
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring M
2nd One-way Clutch
Check frictional surface for wear or damage. If necessary, replace the 2nd one-way clutch. N
Mid Sun Gear
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the mid sun gear.
O
Rear Sun Gear
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub P
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.
AT-603
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
TYPE 1
SCIA5239E
1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. High and low reverse clutch driven 3. High and low reverse clutch retaining
plate plate
4. Snap ring 5. High and low reverse clutch drive 6. Bearing race
plate
TYPE 2
JPDIA1191ZZ
1. Snap ring 2. High and low reverse clutch retaining 3. High and low reverse clutch drive
plate plate
4. High and low reverse clutch driven 5. High and low reverse clutch dish 6. Bearing race
plate plate
7. High and low reverse clutch drum
AT-604
A
1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.
AT
D
SCIA5215E
2. Remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch drum using E
a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch high and low reverse clutch
drum. F
3. Remove high and low reverse clutch component part (drive
plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish plate*) from high G
and low reverse clutch drum.
*: Type 2 only
SCIA2868E H
1. Install high and low reverse clutch component part (drive plates, I
driven plates, and retaining plate) to high and low reverse clutch
drum. (Type 1)
J
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate (five pieces) K
CAUTION:
Check the order of plates. L
SCIA7134E
2. Install high and low reverse clutch component part (dish plate,
drive plates, driven plates, and retaining plate) to high and low M
reverse clutch drum. (Type 2)
1 : Snap ring
N
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate (five pieces)
O
5 : Dish plate
CAUTION: JPDIA1195ZZ
Check the order of plates. P
AT-605
3. Install snap ring to high and low reverse clutch drum using a flat-
bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch high and low reverse clutch
drum.
SCIA2868E
4. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum.

CAUTION:
SCIA5215E

Check the following items. If necessary, replace high and low reverse clutch assembly.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Dish Plate (Type 2)
High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
AT-606
DIRECT CLUTCH
DIRECT CLUTCH
A
AT
G
SCIA6983E
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Direct clutch driven plate 3. Direct clutch retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Direct clutch drive plate 6. Direct clutch dish plate
H
I
1. Remove snap rings from direct clutch drum using a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
CAUTION: J
• Be careful not to scratch direct clutch drum and direct
2. Remove direct clutch component part (drive plates, driven K
plates, retaining plate, and dish plate) from direct clutch drum.
L
SCIA2868E
Assembly INFOID:0000000006363194 M
1. Install direct clutch component part (dish plate, drive plates,

driven plates, and retaining plate) to direct clutch drum. N
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
O
3 : Drive plate (six pieces)
4 : Driven plate (six pieces)
5 : Dish plate
P
CAUTION:
Check the order of plates. SCIA6951E
AT-607
DIRECT CLUTCH
2. Install snap rings to direct clutch drum using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch direct clutch drum and direct
SCIA2868E

Check the following items. If necessary, replace direct clutch assembly.
Direct Clutch Snap Rings
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
Direct Clutch Drive Plates
Direct Clutch Dish Plate
Direct Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
AT-608
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01B]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

General Specification INFOID:0000000006363196
B
Engine models V9X

AT
Transmission model code number 1XR8C, X412E X413E
Stall torque ratio 2.03 : 1
1st 4.887 D
2nd 3.170
3rd 2.027
E
4th 1.412
Transmission gear ratio
5th 1.000
6th 0.864 F
7th 0.775
Reverse 4.041
Input clutch dish plate No installed Installed G
Remarks High and low reverse
No installed Installed
clutch dish plate
H
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
Fluid capacity 10.0 liter (8-6/8 Imp qt)*2
CAUTION: I
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage
the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
J
*1: Refer to MA-25, "Fluids and Lubricants".
*2: The fluid capacity is the reference value.
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000006363197 K
km/h (MPH)
Throttle position L
Gear position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 32 – 36 (20 – 22) 28 – 32 (17 – 20)
D2 → D3 52 – 60 (32 – 37) 44 – 52 (27 – 32)
M
D3 → D4 85 – 95 (53 – 59) 68 – 78 (42 – 48)
D4 → D5 124 – 134 (77 – 83) 88 – 98 (55 – 61)
N
D5 → D6 177 – 187 (110 – 116) 115 – 125 (71 – 78)
D6 → D7 206 – 216 (128 – 134) 141 – 151 (88 – 94)
D7 → D6 196 – 206 (122 – 128) 79 – 89 (49 – 55) O
D6 → D5 167 – 177 (104 – 110) 63 – 73 (39 – 45)
D5 → D4 114 – 124 (71 – 77) 48 – 58 (30 – 36)
P
D4 → D3 73 – 83 (45 – 52) 32 – 42 (20 – 26)
D3 → D2 37 – 45 (23 – 28) 22 – 26 (14 – 16)
D2 → D1 6 – 10 (4 – 6) 6 – 10 (4 – 6)
AT-609
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position
Closed throttle 64 – 72 (40 – 45) 64 – 72 (40 – 45)
Half throttle 121 – 129 (75 – 80) 121 – 129 (75 – 80)
• Vehicle speed with D5 position.
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000006363199
Stall speed 2,315 – 2,615 rpm
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000006363200
Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 32.83 mm (1.293 in)
Total End Play INFOID:0000000006363201
Unit: mm (in)
Total end play Standard 0.25 – 0.55 (0.0098 – 0.0217)

1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.4 (0.055)
Thickness of bearing race for adjusting total end play 1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
2.0 (0.079)
2.2 (0.087)
Reverse Brake Clearance INFOID:0000000006363202
Unit: mm (in)
Reverse brake clearance Standard 0.8 – 1.2 (0.031 – 0.047)

4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
Thickness of retaining plate for adjusting reverse brake clearance 5.4 (0.213)
5.6 (0.220)
5.8 (0.228)
6.0 (0.236)
Front Brake Clearance INFOID:0000000006363203
Unit: mm (in)
Front brake clearance Standard 0.7 – 1.1 (0.028 – 0.043)

2.0 (0.079)
2.2 (0.087)
Thickness of retaining plate for adjusting front brake clearance 2.4 (0.094)
2.6 (0.102)
2.8 (0.110)
AT-610
2346 Brake Clearance INFOID:0000000006363204
A
Unit: mm (in)
2346 brake clearance Standard 1.5 – 1.9 (0.059 – 0.075)

2.0 (0.079)
B
2.2 (0.087)
2.4 (0.094)
Thickness of snap ring for adjusting 2346 brake clearance
2.6 (0.102) AT
2.8 (0.110)
3.0 (0.118)
AT-611

Automatic Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automatic Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automatic Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE

A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT ............................... 189 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 259

P1705 TP SENSOR .......................................... 479 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 510

A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT ................................ 495 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................ 530

Service information Remarks AT

HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID P1767 P1767 AT-169

P1772 P1772 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-171

P1774*3 P1774 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-173 E

• Before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly har-

Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000005443599

ST33400001 • Installing rear oil seal (2WD models)

KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer

ST25850000 Remove oil pump assembly

Tool name Description

1. 315268E000* A/T fluid changing and adjustment

Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to AT-345, "General Specification".

Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from

Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from

Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to AT-345, "General Specification". L

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear J

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

Shift Mechanism INFOID:0000000005443608

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

Name of the Part Abbreviation Function J

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

1st Fwd 3rd

2nd Automatic shift

2nd Automatic shift

With Manual Mode

1st Fwd 3rd

1st Automatic shift J

1st Locks (held sta-

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

TCM Function INFOID:0000000005443609

The function of the TCM is to:

SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS A

With Manual Mode E

SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS

CAN Communication INFOID:0000000005443610

Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

Accelerator pedal position signal(*5) X X X X X X X

Wide open throttle position signal(*5) X X (*4)

Engine speed signals(*5) X X X X X X X F

Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X X X (*4)

Back-up Control (Engine Brake)

During Shift Change

At Low Fluid Temperature

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE

FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH

Wide open throttle position signal(5) X X (4)

Stop lamp switch signal(5) X X X X (4)

Symptoms Vehicle does not move. ( Any position Particular position)

Torque converter one-way clutch